Parameter

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference
Contents
Contents
1 BSC Property Parameters..........................................................................................................1-1
1.1 BSC Global Property Parameters ..................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Basic Data ............................................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Flow Control Data................................................................................................................................1-8 1.1.3 BSC Timer .........................................................................................................................................1-14 1.1.4 Software Parameters ..........................................................................................................................1-18 1.1.5 Resource_User Band..........................................................................................................................1-31 1.1.6 SCCP..................................................................................................................................................1-35 1.2 BSC Device Parameters ..............................................................................................................................1-39 1.2.1 System Clock .....................................................................................................................................1-39 1.2.2 Cabinet Property ................................................................................................................................1-41 1.2.3 SubRack Property ..............................................................................................................................1-42 1.2.4 Power Property...................................................................................................................................1-44 1.2.5 Fan Property.......................................................................................................................................1-47 1.2.6 EAC Property.....................................................................................................................................1-50 1.2.7 Board Property ...................................................................................................................................1-86 1.3 Other Property Parameters ........................................................................................................................1-101 1.3.1 SS7 Signaling Points........................................................................................................................1-101 1.3.2 Inter-Subrack Link ...........................................................................................................................1-105 1.3.3 PCU..................................................................................................................................................1-106 1.3.4 Semipermanent Link ........................................................................................................................1-107 1.3.5 Pb Signaling Link ............................................................................................................................ 1-111 1.3.6 Ater Signaling Link.......................................................................................................................... 1-114 1.3.7 Ater Path .......................................................................................................................................... 1-116 1.3.8 SS7 Link .......................................................................................................................................... 1-117 1.3.9 Timeslots on the E1 Interface...........................................................................................................1-122 1.3.10 Ater OML.......................................................................................................................................1-130
2 BTS Property Parameter............................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Basic Property Parameters of a BTS .............................................................................................................2-2 2.1.1 Basic Information.................................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.2 TMU Auto Active Information.............................................................................................................2-8 2.1.3 Extend ................................................................................................................................................2-10
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Contents
HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference 2.1.4 Output ................................................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.1.5 Active Status & Multiplex Mode .......................................................................................................2-13 2.1.6 Theftproof Alarm Auto-Clear.............................................................................................................2-14 2.1.7 OML Attribute....................................................................................................................................2-15 2.1.8 Auxiliary Equipment..........................................................................................................................2-17 2.1.9 Battery................................................................................................................................................2-18 2.1.10 Air Conditioner Protection ...............................................................................................................2-22 2.1.11 Reserved Parameters ........................................................................................................................2-23
2.2 BTS Board Property Parameters .................................................................................................................2-24 2.2.1 Basic Information...............................................................................................................................2-24 2.2.2 BTS3006C APMU .............................................................................................................................2-26 2.2.3 BTS3006C DPMU .............................................................................................................................2-31 2.2.4 DOMU ...............................................................................................................................................2-37 2.2.5 BTS3012AE DPMU ..........................................................................................................................2-39 2.2.6 DHEU ................................................................................................................................................2-45 2.2.7 DATU.................................................................................................................................................2-46 2.2.8 DEMU................................................................................................................................................2-54 2.2.9 BTS3012 DPMU................................................................................................................................2-60 2.2.10 DTMU..............................................................................................................................................2-66 2.2.11 NFCB ...............................................................................................................................................2-67 2.2.12 DFCB ...............................................................................................................................................2-68 2.2.13 DFCU...............................................................................................................................................2-69 2.2.14 Site Board Parameters......................................................................................................................2-72 2.3 BTS Port Property Parameters ....................................................................................................................2-73 2.4 BTS Subrack Property Parameters ..............................................................................................................2-75 2.5 Antenna Feeder Property Parameters ..........................................................................................................2-76 2.6 BTS Timeslot Parameters Used for Monitoring ..........................................................................................2-79 2.7 Idle Timeslot Parameters.............................................................................................................................2-82
3 Cell Attribute Parameter...........................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Basic Attribute Parameters ............................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Idle Attribute Parameters.............................................................................................................................3-14 3.2.1 Basic Idle Parameters.........................................................................................................................3-14 3.2.2 Advanced Idle Parameters..................................................................................................................3-22 3.3 Call Control Parameters ..............................................................................................................................3-27 3.3.1 Basic Call Control Parameters ...........................................................................................................3-27 3.3.2 Advanced Call Control Parameters ....................................................................................................3-36 3.4 Handover Parameters ..................................................................................................................................3-62 3.4.1 Basic Handover Parameters ...............................................................................................................3-62 3.4.2 Advanced Handover Parameters ........................................................................................................3-71 3.5 Power Control Parameters.........................................................................................................................3-106 3.5.1 Basic Power Control Parameters......................................................................................................3-106
ii
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Contents
3.5.2 Advanced Power Control Parameters............................................................................................... 3-111 3.5.3 AMR Power Control ........................................................................................................................ 3-116 3.6 Channel Parameters...................................................................................................................................3-125 3.6.1 Basic Parameters..............................................................................................................................3-125 3.6.2 Advanced Parameters.......................................................................................................................3-128 3.7 Other Property Parameters ........................................................................................................................3-138 3.7.1 Basic Parameters..............................................................................................................................3-138 3.7.2 Advanced Parameters.......................................................................................................................3-139
4 TRX Property Parameters .........................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Frequency Attributes .....................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 RSL Setting ...................................................................................................................................................4-3 4.3 Channel Property Parameters ........................................................................................................................4-8 4.4 Device Property Parameters ........................................................................................................................4-14 4.5 Radio Link Alarm Parameters .....................................................................................................................4-18 4.6 Reserved Parameters ...................................................................................................................................4-22
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
iii
1 BSC Property Parameters
1
About This Chapter
Section 1.2 BSC Device Parameters 1.3 Other Property Parameters
BSC Property Parameters
The following table lists the sections of this chapter. Describes Describes the BSC global property parameters. Describes the BSC device property parameters. Describes the other property parameters.
1.1 BSC Global Property Parameters
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-1
1.1 BSC Global Property Parameters

1.1.1 Basic Data
BSC Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 32 characters None BSC This parameter indicates the BSC name. None
Area Code Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 0 This parameter indicates the area code for toll calls, for example, 021 for Shanghai in China. None
CC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 86 This parameter indicates the country code, for example, 86 for China. None
MCC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 000999 None 460 This parameter indicates the mobile country code (MCC), for example, 460 for China. None
1-2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
MNC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 00999 None 00 This parameter indicates the mobile network code (MNC). None
A Interface Tag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: GSM_PHASE_1, GSM_PHASE_2, GSM_PHASE_2+ None GSM_PHASE_2 This parameter indicates the phase tag for GSM protocols that the A interface supports. The parameter is selected according to the A interface phase tag provided by the MSC. This parameter is set to GSM_PHASE_2+ if GPRS services are required.
Description:
Remarks:
Um Interface Tag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: GSM_PHASE_1, GSM_PHASE_2, GSM_PHASE_2+ None GSM_PHASE_2 This parameter indicates the phase tag for the GSM protocols that the Um interface supports. None
Abis Interface Tag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: GSM_PHASE_1, GSM_PHASE_2, GSM_PHASE_2+ None GSM_PHASE_2 This parameter indicates the phase tag for the GSM protocols that the Abis interface supports. None
Support Voice TFO Value Range: Yes, No
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-3
Unit: Default Value:
None No This parameter indicates whether the function of Tandem Free Operations is enabled.
Description:
This parameter is configured according to requirements of the current network. If the parameter is selected, the times of coding/decoding operations are changed from twice to once when an MS calls another MS. Thus the speech quality is enhanced. None
Remarks:
Support High Frequency Band Value Range: Unit: Default Value: DCS1800, PCS1900 None DCS1800 This parameter indicates the type of the high frequency band that the BSC supports. The type of the high frequency band that the BSC supports is DCS1800 or PCS1900. None
Description:
Remarks:
NTP Server Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0.0.0.0255.255.255.255 None 255.255.255.255 This parameter indicates the IP address of the synchronization source server for the BSC system time. This parameter indicates the time source of the BSC. This parameter is generally set to the IP address of the M2000 server.
Device Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Value Range: A string with a maximum of 32 characters None BSC6000 This parameter indicates the model of the BSC device. A string with a maximum of 32 characters This parameter can be viewed only.
1-4
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Hardware Platform Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string with a maximum of 32 characters None PARC This parameter indicates the hardware platform used by the BSC. This parameter can be viewed only.
BSC Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 900M, 1800M, 900/1800M None 900/1800M This parameter indicates the type of the BSC. This parameter can be viewed only.
BSC Capacity (TRXs) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 2048 This parameter indicates the maximum number of TRXs that the BSC can support. This parameter can be viewed only.
Maximum BHCA in a BSC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 04294967295 None 2340000 This parameter indicates the maximum BHCA in a BSC. BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempt) indicates the call attempts in busy hours of the BSC. It is one of the BSC capacity indexes. None
Maximum Number of 2 Mbit/s trunk ports Value Range: 065535
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-5
Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks:
None 1792 This parameter indicates the maximum number of 2 Mbit/s trunk ports (E1 ports supported by the A, Ater, Abis, and Pb interfaces) in the BSC. This parameter can be viewed only.
Maximum Number of 64 kbit/s Signaling Links Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None 248 This parameter indicates the maximum number of 64 kbit/s signaling links in the BSC. The number of 2 Mbit/s signaling links is converted to the number of 64 kbit/s signaling links through the number of timeslots. Then the number of the converted 64 kbit/s signaling links is calculated into this parameter. This parameter can be viewed only.
Description:
Remarks:
Number of PCUs Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 0 This parameter indicates the number of PCUs configured in the BSC. It is automatically updated based on the addition or deletion of PCUs. This parameter can be viewed only.
Number of Occupied 2 Mbit/s Trunk Ports Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 0 This parameter indicates the number of E1 ports on the A, Ater, Abis, and Pb interfaces in the BSC. It is automatically updated based on the addition or deletion of E1 ports. This parameter can be viewed only.
1-6
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Number of Occupied 64 kbit/s Signaling Links Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None 0 This parameter indicates the number of 64 kbit/s signaling links in the BSC. The number of 2 Mbit/s signaling links is converted to the number of 64 kbit/s signaling links through the number of timeslots. Then the number of the converted 64 kbit/s signaling links is calculated into this parameter. This parameter varies with the addition or deletion of signaling links. This parameter can be viewed only.
Description:
Remarks:
Support Cell Broadcast Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the BSC supports cell broadcast or not. None
CBC IP Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0.0.0.0255.255.255.255 None 0.0.0.0 This parameter indicates the IP address of the CBC. None
CBC Port Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 6000 This parameter indicates the port number of the CBC. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-7
CB Interface IP Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0.0.0.0255.255.255.255 None 0.0.0.0 This parameter indicates the IP address of the CB interface on the BSC. None
CB Interface Port Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 5000 This parameter indicates the port number of the CB interface on the BSC. None
CB Interface Handshake Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The BSC communicates with the CBC based on the TCP/IP protocol, so the BSC may not detect link interruptions if any. Description: If the BSC software parameter CB Interface Handshake is set to Yes, the BSC sends a handshake message to the CBC after each duration of Cell Broadcast Handshake Timer(s) to detect whether the link to the CBC is normal. None
Remarks:
1.1.2 Flow Control Data

Inner Flow Control Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
1-8
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates whether the inner flow control is allowed. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC calculates the current flow control level based on the load of message packets and the CPU usage. The flow control level is used to determine whether to report the flow control alarm, disable some system functions, and discard the access messages, paging messages, and incoming BSC handover messages. None
Remarks:
Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1004000 None 2000 This parameter indicates the beginning threshold of the discarding of access messages, paging messages, and incoming handover messages. If the mean load of message packets exceeds this threshold, the messages are discarded. This parameter and Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold determine the discarding ratio. Description: If the mean load of message packets is lower than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the discarding ratio is 0%. If the mean load of message packets is higher than Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold, the discarding ratio is 100%. If the mean load of message packets is between Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold and Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold, the discarding ratio is (mean load of message packets Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold) % 100%. Remarks: None
Inner Flow Control Window Size Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 10002000 None 1000 This parameter indicates the number of times the message packets are sampled for the BSC to calculate the mean load of message packets. The BSC samples the message units that are being used each time the BSC processes messages. The BSC calculates the mean value in the detection window when calculating the flow control level. If the size of the window is small, the measurement of the paging flow is sensitive. If the size of the window is large, the measurement of the paging flow is smooth. Remarks: None
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-9
Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 2005000 None 3000 Load threshold for discarding access messages, paging messages, and incoming HO requests When the average load in the system crosses this threshold, relevant messages are discarded based on a specific ratio. None
Description:
Remarks:
Start Cell Broadcast Short Message Control Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates the status of the switch that controls the short messages of the cell broadcast. This parameter can be flexibly set to enable or disable the function of cell broadcast short message control when the system is overloaded. None
Description:
Remarks:
Cell Broadcast Flow Short Message Control Start Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 100512 None 147 This parameter indicates that the function of handover flow control is enabled when the flow of the cell broadcast short messages exceeds the threshold. Description: This parameter is used to discard the subsequent short messages of the cell broadcast when the system is overloaded. The parameter should be set to an optimum value based on your actual situation. Remarks: None
Cell Broadcast Short Msg Flow Control Check Window Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 5001024 None 537
1-10
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the size of the check window for the flow control of cell broadcast short messages. Description: This parameter is used to flexibly set the length of the filter that controls the flow of cell broadcast short messages when the system is overloaded. Thus the paging flow can be controlled properly. If the value of this parameter is low, the measurement of the cell broadcast short message flow is sensitive. If the value of this parameter is high, the measurement is smooth. Remarks: None
Start A-Interface Connectionless Signal Flow Control Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Yes: on No: off Description: This parameter indicates the status of the switch that controls the connectionless signaling flow on the A interface. This parameter can be flexibly set to enable or disable the function of A-interface connectionless signaling flow control when the system is overloaded. Remarks: None
A-Interface Connectionless Signal Flow Control Start Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 100512 None 127 This parameter indicates that the function of A-interface connectionless signaling flow control is enabled when the connectionless signaling flow on the A interface exceeds the threshold. Description: This parameter is used to discard the A-interface connectionless signaling messages when the system is overloaded. The parameter should be set to an optimum value based on your actual situation. Remarks: None
A-Interface Connectionless Signal Flow Control Check Window Value Range: Unit: 100512 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-11
Default Value:
150 This parameter indicates the size of the check window for the flow control of the connectionless signaling on the A interface. This parameter is used to flexibly set the length of the filter that controls the flow of the connectionless signaling on the A interface when the system is overloaded. Thus the paging flow can be controlled properly. When the value of this parameter is low, the measurement of the A-interface connectionless signal flow is sensitive. When the value of this parameter is high, the measurement of the A-interface connectionless signal flow is smooth.
Description:
Remarks:
None
Start Pg Arrival Ctrl Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Yes: on No: off Description: This parameter indicates the status of the switch that controls the arrival of paging messages. This parameter can be flexibly set to enable or disable the function of paging message arrival control when the system is overloaded. The function controls the number of received messages within a granularity period. Remarks: None
Pg State Period Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 100600000 Milliseconds 1000 This parameter indicates the period for controlling received paging requests. None
Pg Max Message Number In Period Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 10400 None 200
1-12
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the maximum number of paging messages from the A interface within a granularity period. Description: When a paging message is received from the A interface, the counter increases by 1. In a granularity period, if the number of paging messages received from the A interface exceeds this parameter, all the excessive paging messages are discarded until a new granularity period starts. None
Remarks:
Start Channel Request Arrival Ctrl Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Yes: on No: off Description: This parameter indicates the status of the switch that controls the arrival of channel request messages. This parameter can be flexibly set to enable or disable the function of channel request message arrival control when the system is overloaded. The function controls the number of received messages within a granularity period. Remarks: None
Channel Request Stat Period Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 100600000 Milliseconds 1000 This parameter indicates the granularity period for the arrival of channel request messages. Message arrival control is used to control the number of received messages within a granularity period. None
Description:
Remarks:
Channel Request Max Message Number In Period Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 10400 None 160
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-13
This parameter indicates the maximum number of channel request messages within a granularity period. Description: When a channel request message is received, the counter increases by 1. In a granularity period, if the number of the received channel request messages exceeds this parameter, all the excessive channel request messages are discarded until a new granularity period starts. None
Remarks:
1.1.3 BSC Timer

Cell Broadcast No Msg Timer(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 5180 Seconds 15 The BSC communicates with the CBC based on the TCP/IP protocol, so the BSC may not detect that the link to the CBC is disrupted. Description: To resolve this problem, Huawei defines the Cell Broadcast None Msg Timer parameter. This parameter specifies a period of time. If the BSC does not receive a message from the CBC within this period of time, the BSC regards the link to the CBC as being disrupted and begins to re-establish the link. None
Remarks:
Cell Broadcast Handshake Timer(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 15 Seconds 3 The BSC communicates with the CBC through the TCP/IP protocols. Therefore, the BSC may not aware of the fact that the link to the CBC is disrupted. Description: If CB Interface Handshake is set to Yes in the Basic Data tab page, the BSC sends a handshake message to the CBC after the cell broadcast handshake timer expires to determine whether the communication with the CBC is normal. None
Remarks:
T1(s) Value Range: Unit: 1300 Seconds
1-14
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
30 This parameter indicates the maximum duration from the transmission of a single blocking/unblocking message to the reception of a single blocking/unblocking message on the A interface.
Description:
After sending a single blocking/unblocking message, the BSC triggers the timer T1. If no blocking/unblocking response from the MSC is received when T1 expires, the BSC resends a single blocking/unblocking message to the MSC. If T1 expires again, the alarm that the BSC fails to block or unblock circuits is reported. None
Remarks:
T4(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1300 Seconds 20 This parameter indicates the maximum duration from the transmission of a reset message to the reception of a response message. Description: If no reset response message is received when T4 expires and the number of timeouts is smaller than MAX BSC Reset Message Retransmission on A-Interface, the BSC resends a reset message to the MSC. If the number of timeouts is greater than MAX BSC Reset Message Retransmission on A-Interface, the BSC reset failure alarm is reported. None
Remarks:
T13(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1300 Seconds 150 This parameter indicates the maximum duration from the time the BSC receives a reset message from the MSC to the time the MSC receives a response message from the BSC. None
T17(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1300 Seconds 30
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-15
This parameter (T17) and the following parameter (T18) are used together to perform flow control. When the MSC overload message or single point message is received for the first time, the level of flow control on the A interface increases and timers T17 and T18 are triggered. Before T17 expires, all the received MSC overload messages are ignored. After T17 expires, the level of flow control on the A interface increases if an MSC overload message is received before T18 expires. Timers T17 and T18 are triggered again. If T18 expires, the level of flow control on the A interface decreases. If the MSC is still overloaded, T18 is triggered again. Otherwise, the process is complete. The value of T17 must be smaller than that of T18.
Description:
Remarks:
T18(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1300 Seconds 30 The T17 and T18 timers are used together to perform flow control. When the MSC overload message or single point message is received for the first time, the level of flow control on the A interface increases and T17 and T18 are triggered. Before T17 expires, all the received MSC overload messages are ignored. After T17 expires, the level of flow control on the A interface increases if an MSC overload message is received before T18 expires. T17 and T18 are triggered again. If T18 expires, the level of flow control on the A interface decreases. If the MSC is still overloaded, T18 is triggered again. Otherwise, the process is complete. The value of T17 must be smaller than that of T18.
Description:
Remarks:
T19(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1300 Seconds 30 After sending an A interface circuit reset message, the BSC triggers the timer T19. When T19 expires, the BSC resends a circuit reset message to the MSC. When T19 expires again, the alarm that the BSC fails to reset circuits is reported. None
Description:
Remarks:
T20(s) Value Range: 1300
1-16
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Seconds 30 This parameter indicates the maximum duration from the transmission of the group blocking/unblocking message to the reception of a response on the A interface.
Description:
After sending a group blocking/unblocking message, the BSC triggers the timer T20. When T20 expires, the BSC resends a group blocking/unblocking message. When T20 expires again, the alarm that the BSC fails to block or unblock a group of circuits is reported. None
Remarks:
T11(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 130 Seconds 8 If an assignment request allows queuing, the queuing procedure starts and the timer T11 is triggered when there is no channel available. If a channel is assigned before T11 expires, T11 stops. If T11 expires, the assignment fails. None
Description:
Remarks:
Tqho (s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 130 Seconds 8 If an incoming BSC handover request allows queuing, the queuing procedure starts and the timer Tqho is triggered when there is no channel available. If a channel is assigned before Tqho expires, Tqho stops. If Tqho expires, the handover fails. None
Description:
Remarks:
Abis Flow Control Timer 1(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 10255 Seconds 30
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-17
Abis Flow Control Timer 1(s) and Abis Flow Control 2(s) are used together to control the level of cell flow control. If the level of cell flow control changes, the maximum number of times the MS resends messages and Tx-integer also change. Description: Abis Flow Control Timer 1(s) is used to increase the flow control level. When a trigger event such as SD channel assignment failure occurs, the BSC determines whether to increase the level of cell flow control based on the status of Abis Flow Control Timer 1 and Abis Flow Control Timer 2. If Abis Flow Control Timer 1 is triggered, the flow control level does not increase. The value of Abis Flow Control Timer 1(s) must be smaller than that of Abis Flow Control Timer 2(s).
Remarks:
Abis Flow Control Timer 2(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 10255 Seconds 60 Abis Flow Control Timer 1(s) and Abis Flow Control 2(s) are used together to control the level of cell flow control. If the level of cell flow control changes, the maximum number of times the MS resends messages and Tx-integer also change. Description: Abis Flow Control Timer 1(s) is used to decrease the flow control level. After the flow control level increases and Abis Flow Control Timer 1 expires, the BSC triggers Abis Flow Control Timer 2. If no trigger event occurs when Abis Flow Control Timer 2 expires, the flow control level decreases. If the flow control level is not 0 after the decrease, Abis Flow Control Timer 2(s) is triggered again. The value of Abis Flow Control Timer 1(s) must be smaller than that of Abis Flow Control Timer 2(s).
Remarks:
1.1.4 Software Parameters

Support Auto Obtaining BTS Logs Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the system automatically obtains the logs of all the BTSs and saves the logs to the log file of the BSC in the early morning on a daily basis. The configuration of this parameter increases the system loads in the early morning of a day.
Remarks:
1-18
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Support Auto Check of BTS Connection Port Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the system automatically detects the misconnection of an E1 cable on the GEIUB board. Description: If a BTS is initialized and the E1 cable of this BTS is misconnected to the port for other BTS on the GEIUB board, the following results may occur: The BTS does not reset automatically. The data configured on the BTS side is not consistent with the data configured on the BSC side. Remarks: None
MAX BSC Reset Message Retransmission on A-Interface Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None 2 If no response to the BSC reset message on the A interface is received within the scheduled time, the BSC reset message is sent again. This parameter defines the maximum number of times the BSC reset message is resent on the A-interface. None
Description:
Remarks:
MAX Retrand Reset Circle Message on A-Interface Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None 2 If no response to the circuit reset message on the A interface is received within the scheduled time, the circuit reset message is sent again. This parameter defines the maximum number of retransmission times of the circuit reset messages. Remarks: None
Description:
MAX Retrand Maintenance Message on Pb-Interface Value Range: Unit: 065535 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-19
Default Value:
2 If the timeout duration of the messages (blocking, unblocking, reset, and non-installation) transmitted over the Pb interface exceeds the maximum duration of the timer, retransmitting the messages is required. This parameter defines the maximum number of retransmission times of the messages.
Description:
Remarks:
None
Sent Confusion Message to MSC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No If the BSC receives a message that cannot be decoded over the A interface, this parameter indicates whether to send a message carrying fault location information to the MSC. This parameter is configured based on the situation on the MSC side. Remarks: None
Description:
Support Sent 2QUATER Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter controls the indicator bit of the 2QUATER message in the system message 3. Description: This parameter indicates whether a 2QUATER tag is sent. If the parameter is set to Yes, an MS is notified to receive the 2QUATER message. If the parameter is set to No, an MS is notified not to receive the 2QUATER message. None
Remarks:
Send 3G class Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
1-20
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter controls the 3G Early Classmark Sending Restriction field in the system message 3. The parameter notifies an MS whether to send a 3G classmark message when an early classmark is sent. None
Remarks:
NR_of_FDD_cells Writing Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter is used to control the values of FDD_INDIC0, NR_OF_FDD_CELLS, and FDD_Cellinformation in 2QUATER and MI. If there are 3G neighboring cells with the scrambles of 0 and this parameter is set to Yes, then: FDD_INDIC0: 1 Description: NR_OF_FDD_CELLS: excluding the cells whose scrambles are 0 FDD_Cellinformation: excluding the cells whose scrambles are 0 If there are 3G neighboring cells with the scrambles of 0 and this parameter is set to No, then: FDD_INDIC0: 1 NR_OF_FDD_CELLS: including the cells whose scrambles are 0 FDD_Cellinformation: including the cells whose scrambles are 0 Remarks: None
Support Record Discarded Paging Msg particularly Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No If the BSC performs flow control, the BSC discards some paging messages according to the design. This parameter indicates whether to record the discarded messages to the debugging log when paging messages are discarded. None
Description:
Remarks:
Disconnect Handover Protect Timer(s) Value Range: Unit: 015 Seconds
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-21
Default Value:
15 The timer is started after the DISCONNECT message is received. An MS is not allowed to perform handover during this period.
Description:
If an MS performs handover and cannot receive the release message during the subsequent onhook, it may be suspended. The value 15 indicates that the protection function is not enabled. None
Remarks:
Directed Retry AssFail Send Enable Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Disable, Enable None Disable Before directed retry, If the MSC supports the assignment failure command, the assignment failure command with a cause value of directed retry is sent to the MSC. If the MSC does not support the assignment failure command, the assignment failure command with a cause value of directed retry is not sent to the MSC. Remarks: None
Description:
SpeechVer in SDCCH Ho Req Ack Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes In the signaling channel handover, Description: If the MSC supports the carrying of Speech Ver in the HO REQ ACK message, the HO REQ ACK message carries Speech Ver. If the MSC does not support the carrying of Speech Ver in the HO REQ ACK message, the HO REQ ACK message does not carry Speech Ver. For SDCCH handovers, Speech Ver is carried in the HO REQ ACK message, and SpeechVer Send Flag In Ho Req Ack and A Interface Tag must be set to Yes and Phase 2+ respectively. If the handover between signaling channels over different BSCs fails, the value of this parameter requires to be modified.
Remarks:
Cell List Send Flag In Ass Cmp Value Range: Yes, No
1-22
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None No According to the protocols, the assignment complete message carries the cell ID only when the cell changes during the assignment. The MSCs of some vendors require that the assignment complete message must carry the cell ID. None
Description:
Remarks:
CicPool Send Flag in Ass Cmp Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of the information about the IE circuit pool in the Ass Cmp message, the Ass Cmp message carries the information about the IE circuit pool. If the MSC does not support the carrying of the information about the IE circuit pool in the Ass Cmp message, the Ass Cmp message does not carry the information about the IE circuit pool. None
Description:
Remarks:
CicPool Send Flag In Ho Req Ack Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of the information about the IE circuit pool in the HO_REQ_ACK message, the HO_REQ_ACK message carries the information about the IE circuit pool. If the MSC does not support the carrying of the information about the IE circuit pool in the HO_REQ_ACK message, the HO_REQ_ACK message does not carry the information about the IE circuit pool. None
Description:
Remarks:
ChosenCh Flag Send In Ass Cmp Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-23
Description:
If the MSC supports the carrying of chosen_ch in the Ass Cmp message, the Ass Cmp message carries chosen_ch. If the MSC does not support the carrying of chosen_ch in the Ass Cmp message, the Ass Cmp message does not carry chosen_ch. None
Remarks:
SpeechVer Send Flag In Ass Cmp Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of speech_ver in the Ass Cmp message, the Ass Cmp message carries speech_ver. If the MSC does not support the carrying of speech_ver in the Ass Cmp message, the Ass Cmp message does not carry speech_ver. The speech_ver is not carried if the channel type is set to Data in the assignment request.
Description:
Remarks:
ChosenEncrypAlo Send Flag In Ass Cmp Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of chosen_encryp_algorithm in the Ass Cmp message, the Ass Cmp message carries chosen_encryp_algorithm. If the MSC does not support the carrying of chosen_encryp_algorithm in the Ass Cmp message, the Ass Cmp message does not carry chosen_encryp_algorithm. The Ass Cmp message carries chosen_encryp_algorithm only when this parameter is set to Yes and the encryption algorithms of the two cells concerned change.
Description:
Remarks:
CicPool Send Flag In Ass Fail Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
1-24
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
If the MSC supports the carrying of the information about the circuit pool in the Ass Fail message, the Ass Fail message carries the information about the circuit pool. If the MSC does not support the carrying of the information about the circuit pool in the Ass Fail message, the Ass Fail message does not carry the information about the circuit pool. None
Remarks:
CicPool List Send Flag In Ass Fail Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Not sending, Sending according to protocol, Unconditionally sending None Not sending If the MSC supports the carrying of the information on the circuit pool in the Ass Fail message, the Ass Fail message carries the information on the circuit pool. If the MSC does not support the carrying of the information on the circuit pool in the Ass Fail message, the Ass Fail message does not carry the information on the circuit pool. The value Sending according to protocol means that the Ass Fail message carries the information on the circuit pool only when the assignment fails due to circuit pool mismatch or switch circuit pool.
Description:
Remarks:
ChosenCh Send Flag In Ho Req Ack Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of chosen_ch in the HO_REQ_ACK message, the HO_REQ_ACK message carries chosen_ch. Description: If the MSC does not support the carrying of chosen_ch in the HO_REQ_ACK message, the HO_REQ_ACK message does not carry chosen_ch. None
Remarks:
Chosen EncrypAlo Send Flag In Ho Req Ack Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-25
Description:
If the MSC supports the carrying of chosen_encryp_algorithm in the HO_REQ_ACK message, the HO_REQ_ACK message carries chosen_encryp_algorithm. If the MSC does not support the carrying of chosen_encryp_algorithm in the HO_REQ_ACK message, the HO_REQ_ACK message does not carry chosen_encryp_algorithm. The HO_REQ_ACK message carries chosen_encryp_algorithm only when this parameter is set to Yes and the encryption algorithms of the two cells concerned change.
Remarks:
SpeechVer Send Flag In Ho Req Ack Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of speech_ver in the HO_REQ_ACK message, the HO_REQ_ACK message carries speech_ver. Description: If the MSC does not support the carrying of speech_ver in the HO_REQ_ACK message, the HO_REQ_ACK message does not carry speech_ver. For SDCCH handovers, SpeechVer in SDCCH Ho Req Ack must be set to Yes to enable the carrying of Speech Ver in the HO REQ ACK message.
Remarks:
CicPool Send Flag In Ho Fail Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of the information about the circuit pool in the HO FAIL message, the HO FAIL message carries the information about the circuit pool. If the MSC does not support the carrying of the information about the circuit pool in the HO FAIL message, the HO FAIL message does not carry the information about the circuit pool. None
Description:
Remarks:
CicPoolList Send Flag In Ho Fail Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Not sending, Sending according to protocol, Unconditionally sending None Not sending
1-26
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
If the MSC supports the carrying of the list of the information about the circuit pool in the HO FAIL message, the HO FAIL message carries the list of the information about the circuit pool. If the MSC does not support the carrying of the list of the information about the circuit pool in the HO FAIL message, the HO FAIL message does not carry the list of the information about the circuit pool. The value Sending according to protocol means that the HO FAIL message carries the information on the circuit pool only when the assignment fails due to circuit pool mismatch or switch circuit pool.
Remarks:
ChosenCh Send Flag In Ho Perform Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of chosen_ch in the Ho Perform message, the Ho Perform message carries chosen_ch. If the MSC does not support the carrying of chosen_ch in the Ho Perform message, the Ho Perform message does not carry chosen_ch. None
Description:
Remarks:
ChosenEncryAlg Send Flag In Ho Perform Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of chosen_encryp_algorithm in the Ho Perform message, the Ho Perform message carries chosen_encryp_algorithm. If the MSC does not support the carrying of chosen_encryp_algorithm in the Ho Perform message, the Ho Perform message does not carry chosen_encryp_algorithm. The Ho Perform message carries chosen_encryp_algorithm only when this parameter is set to Yes and the encryption algorithms of the two cells concerned change.
Description:
Remarks:
SpeechVer Send Flag In Ho Perform Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-27
Description:
If the MSC supports the carrying of speech_ver in the Ho Perform message, the Ho Perform message carries speech_ver. If the MSC does not support the carrying of speech_ver in the Ho Perform message, the Ho Perform message does not carry speech_ver. For SDCCH handovers, the Ho Perform message does not carry speech_ver even though this parameter is set to Yes.
Remarks:
ChosenEncrypAlg Send Flag In Cipher Cmp Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes If the MSC supports the carrying of chosen_encryp_algorithm in the Cipher Cmp message, the Cipher Cmp message carries chosen_encryp_algorithm. If the MSC does not support the carrying of chosen_encryp_algorithm in the Cipher Cmp message, the Cipher Cmp message does not carry chosen_encryp_algorithm. None
Description:
Remarks:
Response on out-BSC HO Req Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether an information element for response request is carried when the HO_REQUIRED message is sent to the MSC. Description: The information element is optional. It notifies the MSC whether to respond to the HO_REJECT message when the HO_REQUIRED message does not trigger handover. This parameter should be configured properly according to the support capability of the MSC on the information element for response request. Thus the MSC can correctly process the HO_REQUIRED message. Remarks: None
ResCheckAllowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
1-28
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates whether a resource check is performed between the resource usage subsystem and the resource management subsystem. If the resource check is allowed, resource deadlock is avoided in case of abnormality. None
Remarks:
LCS Support Control Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the MSC supports the LCS function. Therefore, the parameter should be properly configured according to the support capability of the MSC. The required License is needed to support this function.
Ra Max Count Percent Period Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0254 None 15 This parameter indicates the maximum access requests in a random access period. In a random access period, if the number of access requests is greater than Ra Max Count Percent Period, a new access request is discarded.
Ra Check Period (50 ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 120 50 ms 2 This parameter indicates the measurement period of random access requests. Description: In the measurement period, if the number of random access requests is greater than Ra Max Count Percent Period, a new random access request is discarded. None
Remarks:
License Alarm Threshold Value Range: 9099 (%)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-29
None 95 When the proportion of the current BSC resource usage to the allowed license usage exceeds this parameter, a resource overload alarm occurs. None
License Resume Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 8095 (%) None 90 When the proportion of the current BSC resource usage to the allowed license usage is not greater than this parameter, the resource overload alarm is cleared. The value of License Resume Alarm Threshold must be lower than that of License Alarm Threshold.
Remarks:
License Forbid Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 105120 (%) None 115 When the proportion of the current BSC resource usage to the allowed license usage exceeds this parameter, the service access that uses this resource is forbidden. None
License Relieve Forbid Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 100110 (%) None 100 When the proportion of the current BSC resource usage to the allowed license usage is not greater than this parameter, the service access that uses this resource is allowed. The License Relieve Forbid Threshold must be smaller than the License Forbid Threshold.
Remarks:
1-30
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
HO_RQD Speech Ver Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the Handover Required message carries the Current Channel information element when the BSC sends the message to the MSC. The parameter should be configured based on whether the MSC supports the Handover Required message to carry the Current Channel information element. None
Description:
Remarks:
HO_RQD Current Channel Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the Handover Required message carries the Speech Ver information element when the BSC sends the message to the MSC. The parameter should be configured based on whether the MSC supports the HandOver Required message to carry the Speech Ver information element. None
Description:
Remarks:
1.1.5 Resource_User Band

First User Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: NULL, TMSI, IMSI, MSISDN None NULL The type of the first user to be bound can be TMSI, IMSI, or MSISDN. If the First User Type is NULL, infer that the first user is invalid. None
First User Identity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: A string of 32 characters None None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-31
When the First User Type is TMSI, the First User Identity is the TMSI number of the MS. Description: When the First User Type is IMSI, the First User Identity is the IMSI number of the MS. When the First User Type is MSISDN, the First User Identity is the MSISDN number of the MS. When the First User Type is NULL, the First User Identity is invalid. Remarks: None
Second User Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: NULL, TMSI, IMSI, MSISDN None NULL The type of the second user to be bound can be TMSI, IMSI, or MSISDN. Description: If the value is Null, the second user is invalid. When the Second User Type is NULL, infer that the Second User Identity is invalid. Remarks: None
Second User Identity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: A string of 32 characters None 0 When the Second User Type is TMSI, the Second User Identity is the TMSI number of the MS. Description: When the Second User Type is IMSI, the Second User Identity is the IMSI number of the MS. When the Second User Type is MSISDN, the Second User Identity is the MSISDN number of the MS. When the Second User Type is NULL, the Second User Identity is invalid. Remarks: None
Ater Connection Path Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 255
1-32
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates the index number of the Ater link to be bound. The parameter Ater Connection Path Index must be set for the configured Ater connection path. Otherwise, the binding of the Ater timeslot does not become valid and the parameter needs to be reset. The value 255 indicates that the Ater timeslots are not bound.
Remarks:
Start Sub-Timeslot of Ater Connection Path Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 4127 None 127 This parameter indicates the initial timeslot number of the Ater link to be bound. The Start Sub-Timeslot of Ater Connection Path must be smaller than or equal to the End Sub-Timeslot of Ater Connection Path.
End Sub-Timeslot of Ater Connection Path Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 4127 None 127 This parameter indicates the end timeslot number of the Ater link to be bound. The End Sub-Timeslot of Ater Connection Path must be greater than or equal to the Start Sub-Timeslot of Ater Connection Path.
GDPUC Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0255 None 255 This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the GDPUC board is located. The TC resources to be bound reside on the GDPUC board. The parameter GDPUC Subrack No. must be set for the configured GDPUC Subrack No. Otherwise, the binding of the DSP timeslot does not become valid and the parameter needs to be reset. The value 255 indicates that the DSP timeslots are not bound.
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-33
GDPUC Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 027 None 27 This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GDPUC board is located. The TC resources to be bound reside on the GDPUC board. Remarks: The parameter GDPUC Slot No. must be set for the configured GDPUC Slot No. Otherwise, the binding of the DSP timeslot does not become valid and the parameter needs to be reset.
DSP No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 021 None 21 This parameter indicates the number of the DSP where the TC resources to be bound reside. None
DSP Start Timeslot Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 043 None 43 This parameter indicates the initial number of the TC resources to be bound. The DSP Start Timeslot must be smaller than or equal to the DSP End Timeslot.
DSP End Timeslot Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 043 None 43 This parameter indicates the end number of the TC resources to be bound. The DSP End Timeslot must be greater than or equal to the DSP Start Timeslot.
1-34
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Resource Reserved Time (Min) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0720 Minutes 0 This parameter indicates the reserved time for the resources to be bound. If expiry occurs, the binding function of user resources is disabled. Remarks: The value 0 indicates that the binding function of user resources is disabled.
1.1.6 SCCP
SCCP_CONNECT (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 60120 Seconds 90 The SCCP messages are classified into connection messages and connectionless messages. Description: This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of the connection message and the reception of the connection acknowledgement message. If the connection acknowledgement message is not received during the interval, infer that the connection fails. Then the timeout handling procedure starts. Remarks: None
SCCP_TIAS (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 60120 Seconds 90 If no user messages are transmitted over the connected SCCP layer, the system periodically sends a message (inactivity detection message) to detect the SCCP connection. This parameter indicates the period. This parameter is used to periodically detect the availability of the established connection. Remarks: None
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-35
SCCP_TIAR (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 6601260 Seconds 720 This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of the inactivity detection message and the response. Description: If no response is received during the interval, infer that the established connection is not available. Then the timeout handling procedure starts. None
Remarks:
SCCP_TREL (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1020 Seconds 15 This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of the SCCP Released message and the Release complete message. Description: If the Release complete message is not received from the peer end, the timeout handling procedure starts. The message is retransmitted or the connection release failure handling is performed. None
Remarks:
SCCP_TREPEATREL (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1020 Seconds 15 If the SCCP Released message is transmitted but the Release complete message is not received within the interval specified by this parameter, the system retransmits the SCCP Released message and expects a response message from the peer end. None
Description:
Remarks:
SCCP_TINT (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 60 Seconds 60
1-36
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description: Remarks:
If the Release complete message is not received within the interval specified by this parameter, the connection fails to be released. Then the procedure for handling connection release failures is started. None
SCCP_TGUARD (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 480960 Seconds 900 After being restarted, the SCCP waits a period for the established connection to restore to the available status. The period is specified by this parameter. None
SCCP_TRESET Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1020 Seconds 15 This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of the SCCP Reset request message and the release of the temporary connection. None
SCCP_TREASSEMBLY (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1020 Seconds 20 After receiving the first segmentation message, the SCCP at one end waits for the rest segmentation messages from the other end. This parameter indicates the interval between the reception of one segmentation message and the reception of the next segmentation message. None
Description:
Remarks:
SCCP_STATINFO (Sec) Value Range: Unit: 51200 Seconds
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-37
Default Value: Description: Remarks:
60 This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of the subsystem status request and the reception of a response. None
SCCP_TCOORDCHG (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 90 Seconds 90 This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of the SOR (subsystem-out-of-service-request) message and the reception of the SOG (subsystem-out-of-service-grant) message. None
SCCP_TIGNORESST (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 60 Seconds 60 This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of the SST (subsystem-status-test) message and the reception of the SSA (subsystem-allowed) message. None
SCCP_TFREEZEN (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 30 Seconds 30 This parameter indicates the period for freezing the local reference number (LRN) of the XUDT (Extended Unit data). The LRN should be frozen after the XUDT message is transmitted. Using the LRN is prohibited during this period. None
Description:
Remarks:
SCCP_TEA (Sec) Value Range: Unit: 10 Seconds
1-38
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
10 When the SCCP sends an acceleration message, start this timer and wait for a response message. None
SCCP_TLRN (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 15 Seconds 15 When the SCCP connection is interrupted, repeated use of the LRN is prohibited during the period specified by this parameter. None
SCCP_TRESOURCE (Sec) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 3600 Seconds 3600 The status of the connection between the SCCP and the upper-layer users is periodically checked for the availability of the connection. This parameter indicates the interval between the periodical checks. None
1.2 BSC Device Parameters

1.2.1 System Clock
Source No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 04 None None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-39
This parameter indicates the number of the clock source. After the system is started, clock sources are added to the GGCU. After the addition takes effect, a uniform clock source is provided for the entire system. Each clock source consists of a source type and a source subtype. The configuration of clock sources 14 is optional. If clock sources 14 are not configured, the system sets clock source 0 to the reference clock. Clock source 0 is the fixed clock source of the crystal oscillator for the GGCU. It cannot be configured. Adhere to the following principles when adding clock sources to the GGCU: Remarks: Repeated addition is allowed. If the clock sources for the GGCU are the same, no operation is required. If the clock source differs from the existed clock source in the GGCU, delete the existed clock source and then add the clock source.
Description:
Source Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: BITS0, BITS1, LINE0, LINE1, NONE None NONE This parameter indicates the type of the clock source. The value NONE indicates that no clock source is configured. If the source type is BITS0 or BITS1, the source subtype must be 2M_HZ or 2M_Bps. Remarks: If the source type is LINE0 or LINE1, the source subtype must be 8K_HZ. If the source type is LINE0 or LINE1, the main local subrack must be configured with LINE0-8KHZ or LINE1-8KHZ.
Source SubType Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 2M_HZ, 2M_Bps, 8K_HZ, NONE None NONE This parameter indicates the subtype of the clock source. The value NONE indicates that no clock source is configured. See the remarks in Source Type.
1-40
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Work Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Automatic, Manual, Free Run None Automatic This parameter indicates the work mode (strategy) of the clock source. Description: In Free Run mode, clock source 0 is set to the clock source for the GGCU. The system generally uses Automatic mode. The Manual mode is generally used for test purposes. Specifying the priority level is not required for the Automatic mode. Remarks: Specifying the priority level is required for the Manual mode. The priority level for the Free Run mode is 0.
Priority Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 14 None None This parameter indicates the clock source number in use. This parameter is valid only when it is configured in Manual mode.
1.2.2 Cabinet Property

Cabinet No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 03 None 0 This parameter indicates the cabinet number. No subnode exists when a cabinet is deleted. Remarks: Deleting cabinet 0 is not allowed. Modifying the value of this parameter is prohibited after the system starts.
Cabinet Type Value Range: Unit: Local cabinet, remote cabinet None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-41
Default Value:
Local cabinet This parameter indicates whether a cabinet is a local cabinet or a remote cabinet.
Description:
Generally, a cabinet configured on the BSC side is called local cabinet. To save the transmission resources between the MSC and the BSC, a cabinet is configured on the MSC side to hold GTCS subracks. Such a cabinet is called remote cabinet. Modifying the value of this parameter is not allowed after the system starts.
Remarks:
1.2.3 SubRack Property

Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 012 None 0 This parameter indicates the subrack number. A maximum of four remote subracks and four local subracks are allowed. Description: Only one main local subrack and only one main remote subrack are allowed. Subrack 0 is the main local subrack and cannot be deleted. Subrack 12 cannot be deleted. The numbering of subracks starts from 0. The numbers of the subracks but subrack 0/1 must satisfy the following condition: Remarks: Subrack No. = Cabinet No. % 3 + Location No. Where, Subrack No. indicates the cabinet number, Cabinet No. indicates the cabinet number, and Location No. indicates the subrack position (0: up; 1: middle; 2: down). If a subrack manages the power distribution subrack, the subrack can be deleted only after the power distribution subrack is deleted.
Cabinet No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 03 None 0 This parameter indicates the number of the cabinet where the subrack is located.
1-42
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
The numbers of the cabinets but cabinet 0 must satisfy the following condition: Remarks: Cabinet No. = (Subrack No. Location No.)/3 Where, Cabinet No. indicates the cabinet number, Subrack No. indicates the subrack number, and Location No. indicates the subrack position (0: up; 1: middle; 2: down).
Location No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02 None 0 This parameter indicates the location of the subrack in the cabinet. 0: down 1: middle 2: up
Is Main Subrack Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: True, False None True This parameter indicates whether a subrack is the main subrack. Only one main local subrack and only one main remote subrack are allowed. Subrack 0 is the main local subrack and cannot be deleted.
Is Remote Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: True, False None False This parameter indicates whether a subrack is the remote subrack. A remote cabinet houses a maximum of four subracks. Remarks: When the GTCS subrack is installed locally, a maximum of eight subracks are installed locally. Otherwise, a maximum of four subracks are installed locally. Subrack 0 is the main local subrack. Subrack Type Value Range: GEPS, GTCS, GMPS
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-43
None GEPS (local subrack) GTCS (remote subrack) This parameter indicates the logic type of a subrack. None
1.2.4 Power Property

Master SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 011 None 0 This parameter indicates the manager of the power supply (foreign key, see the SubRack No. parameter). None
BUZZER SWITCH Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates the status of the buzzer switch. None
HW_ALM_THD_HIGHHUMIDITY Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 8590 (%) None 90 This parameter indicates the alarm threshold of humidity. If the humidity exceeds this parameter, the Abnormal Humidity alarm occurs. None
HW_ALM_THD_HIGHTEMPERATURE Value Range: 7075
1-44
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
C 70 This parameter indicates the alarm threshold of temperature. If the temperature exceeds this parameter, the Abnormal Temperature alarm occurs. None
HW_ALM_THD_HIGHVOLTAGE1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 59 to 57 V 57 This parameter indicates the alarm threshold of voltage. If the voltage of the first route exceeds this parameter, the Abnormal Voltage alarm for the first route occurs. None
HW_ALM_THD_HIGHVOLTAGE2 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 59 to 57 V 57 This parameter indicates the alarm threshold of voltage. If the voltage of the second route exceeds this parameter, the Abnormal Voltage alarm for the second route occurs. None
HW_ALM_THD_LOWHUMIDITY Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 510 (%) None 5 This parameter indicates the alarm threshold of humidity. If the humidity is smaller than this parameter, the Abnormal Humidity alarm occurs. None
HW_ALM_THD_LOWTEMPERATURE Value Range: 05
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-45
C 5 This parameter indicates the alarm threshold of temperature. If the temperature is smaller than this parameter, the Abnormal Temperature alarm occurs. None
HW_ALM_THD_LOWVOLTAGE1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 42 to 40 V 42 This parameter indicates the alarm threshold of voltage. If the voltage of the first route is smaller than this parameter, the Abnormal Voltage alarm for the first route occurs. None
HW_ALM_THD_LOWVOLTAGE2 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 42 to 40 V 42 This parameter indicates the alarm threshold of voltage. If the voltage of the second route is smaller than this parameter, the Abnormal Voltage alarm for the second route occurs. None
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT SWITCH ALARM 1-6 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Close
1-46
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates whether the Abnormal PDB Output Switch Sensor alarm is triggered. If the PDB is not connected with the subrack, that is, the PDB is not used, the Abnormal PDB Output Switch Sensor alarm is reported. Therefore, the user can decide whether to allow the reporting of the Abnormal PDB Output Switch Sensor alarm (six routes in total). Description: When this parameter is set to Open, the Abnormal PDB Output Switch Sensor alarm is generated and reported to the LMT. When this parameter is set to Close, the generated Abnormal PDB Output Switch Sensor alarm is not reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the recovery alarm of the unrecovered Abnormal PDB Output Switch Sensor alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
1.2.5 Fan Property

Speed Regulation Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Manual, Software Auto, Hardware Auto None Software Auto This parameter indicates the speed regulation mode of the fan. None
Communication Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether to trigger the Communication Failure alarm. Description: When this parameter is set to Open, all Communication Failure alarms are reported to the LMT. When this parameter is set to Close, no Communication Failure alarm is reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the alarms cleared later are reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-47
Fan Block Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether to trigger the Fan Block alarm. When this parameter is set to Open, all Fan Block alarms are reported to the LMT. Description: When this parameter is set to Close, no Fan Block alarm is reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the alarms cleared later are reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Hardware Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether to trigger the Fan Board Hardware Failure alarm. Description: When this parameter is set to Open, all Hardware Failure alarms are reported to the LMT. When this parameter is set to Close, no Hardware Failure alarm is reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the alarms cleared later are reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Inlet Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether to trigger the Fan Box Temperature Sensor Invalidation alarm at the air inlet. Description: When this parameter is set to Open, all Fan Box Temperature Sensor Invalidation alarms related to the air inlet are reported to the LMT. When this parameter is set to Close, no Fan Box Temperature Sensor Invalidation alarm related to the air inlet is reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the alarms cleared later are reported to the LMT.
1-48
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Outlet Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether to trigger the Fan Box Temperature Sensor Invalidation alarm at the air outlet. Descriptio n: When this parameter is set to Open, all Fan Box Temperature Sensor Invalidation alarms related to the air outlet are reported to the LMT. When this parameter is set to Close, no Fan Box Temperature Sensor Invalidation alarm related to the air outlet is reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the alarms cleared later are reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Speed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 50100 (%) None 60 This parameter indicates the percentage of the fan rotation speed to the rated rotation speed (also the PWM value of the fan). None
Sensor Fault Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether to trigger the Abnormal Temperature alarm. Description: When this parameter is set to Open, all Abnormal Temperature alarms are reported to the LMT. When this parameter is set to Close, no Abnormal Temperature alarm is reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the alarms cleared later are reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-49
Input Power1 Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether to trigger the Fan Subrack Power-Off alarm for the first route. Description: When this parameter is set to Open, all Fan Subrack Power-Off alarms related to power 1 are reported to the LMT. When this parameter is set to Close, no Fan Subrack Power-Off alarm related to power 1 is reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the alarms cleared later are reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Input Power2 Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether to trigger the Fan Subrack Power-Off alarm for the second route. Description: When this parameter is set to Open, all Fan Subrack Power-Off alarms related to power 2 are reported to the LMT. When this parameter is set to Close, no Fan Subrack Power-Off alarm related to power 2 is reported to the LMT. When the value of this parameter is changed from Open to Close, the alarms cleared later are reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
1.2.6 EAC Property

Switch for Relay 1-6 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Open, Close None Open Status of relays 16: Open or Close None
1-50
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Enable Voltage Alarm Reporting for 24V Power Supply Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether reporting Abnormal Voltage is allowed when the voltage of the 24 V power supply is abnormal. If this parameter is always set to Open, all the Abnormal Voltage messages during sensor connection are reported to the LMT. Description: If this parameter is always set to Close, no Abnormal Voltage messages are reported to the LMT during sensor connection. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Abnormal Voltage is reported to the LMT. Remarks: If the environment monitor device uses the 48 V power supply, the alarms related to the 24 V power supply are not reported.
Enable Voltage Alarm Reporting for 48V Power Supply Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether reporting Abnormal Voltage is allowed when the voltage of the 48 V power supply is abnormal. If this parameter is always set to Open, all the Abnormal Voltage messages during sensor connection are reported to the LMT. Description: If this parameter is always set to Close, no Abnormal Voltage messages are reported to the LMT during sensor connection. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Abnormal Voltage is reported to the LMT. Remarks: If the environment monitor device uses the 48 V power supply, the alarms related to the 24 V power supply are not reported.
Enable Temperature Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-51
This parameter indicates whether reporting Abnormal Temperature is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, Abnormal Temperature is generated and reported to the LMT when the actual temperature is higher than Upper Limit of Temperature Alarm or is lower than Lower Limit of Temperature Alarm during sensor connection. Description: If the parameter is always set to Close, Abnormal Temperature is not generated even when the actual temperature is higher than Upper Limit of Temperature Alarm or is lower than Lower Limit of Temperature Alarm during sensor connection. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Abnormal Voltage is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Enable Humidity Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether reporting Abnormal Humidity is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the generated humidity alarms are reported to the LMT when the ambient humidity is higher than Upper Limit of Humidity Alarm or is lower than Lower Limit of Humidity Alarm during sensor connection. Description: If the parameter is always set to Close, no humidity alarms are generated even when the ambient humidity for the environment monitor device is higher than Upper Limit of Humidity Alarm or is lower than Lower Limit of Humidity Alarm during humidity sensor connection. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered board humidity alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Enable Analog Parameter 1 Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open
1-52
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern Simulate Sensor1 Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the Extern Simulate Sensor1 Alarms generated during sensor connection are reported to the LMT. If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern Simulate Sensor1 Alarms is reported to the LMT during sensor connection. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern Simulate Sensor1 Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: The input mode of external simulate sensor 1 is of two types: voltage and current.
Description:
Enable Analog Parameter 2 Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern Simulate Sensor2 Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the Extern Simulate Sensor2 Alarms generated during sensor connection are reported to the LMT. If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern Simulate Sensor2 Alarm is reported to the LMT during sensor connection. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern Simulate Sensor2 Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: The input mode of external simulate sensor 2 is of two types: voltage and current.
Description:
Enable Analog Parameter 3 Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-53
This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern Simulate Sensor3 Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the Extern Simulate Sensor3 Alarms generated during sensor connection are reported to the LMT. If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern Simulate Sensor3 Alarm is reported to the LMT during sensor connection. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern Simulate Sensor3 Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: The input mode of external simulate sensor 3 is of two types: voltage and current.
Description:
Enable Analog Parameter 4 Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open The input mode of external simulate sensor 4 is of two types: voltage and current. This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern Simulate Sensor4 Alarm is allowed. Description: If the parameter is always set to Open, all the Extern Simulate Sensor4 Alarms generated during sensor connection are reported to the LMT. If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern Simulate Sensor4 Alarm is reported to the LMT during sensor connection. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern Simulate Sensor4 Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Enable Water Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open
1-54
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern Water Sensor Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the generated Extern Water Sensor Alarms are reported to the LMT. Description: If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern Water Sensor Alarm is reported to the LMT. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern Water Sensor Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Enable Smoke Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern Smoke Sensor Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the generated Extern Smoke Sensor Alarms are reported to the LMT. Description: If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern Smoke Sensor Alarm is reported to the LMT. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern Smoke Sensor Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Enable infrared sensor alarm reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern InfraRed Sensor Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the generated Extern InfraRed Sensor Alarms are reported to the LMT. Description: If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern InfraRed Sensor Alarm is reported to the LMT. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern InfraRed Sensor Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-55
Enable Door Status Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern DoorEngine Sensor Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the generated Extern DoorEngine Sensor Alarms are reported to the LMT. Description: If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern DoorEngine Sensor Alarm is reported to the LMT. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern DoorEngine Sensor Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: Open
Enable External Switch 1 Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern Figure Sensor1 Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the Extern Figure Sensor1 Alarms during the sensor connection of external switch 1 are reported to the LMT. Description: If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern Figure Sensor1 Alarm is reported to the LMT during the sensor connection of external switch 1. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern Figure Sensor1 Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Enable External Switch 2 Alarm Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Open, Close None Open
1-56
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates whether reporting Extern Figure Sensor2 Alarm is allowed. If the parameter is always set to Open, all the Extern Figure Sensor2 Alarms during the sensor connection of external switch 2 are reported to the LMT. Description: If the parameter is always set to Close, no Extern Figure Sensor2 Alarm is reported to the LMT during the sensor connection of external switch 2. If the parameter is switched from Open to Close, the recovery alarm corresponding to the unrecovered Extern Figure Sensor2 Alarm is reported to the LMT. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-57
1-58
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-59
1-60
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-61
1-62
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-63
1-64
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-65
1-66
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-67
1-68
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-69
1-70
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-71
Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: None If external analog 1 is of the voltage type, the unit is V. If external analog 1 is of the current type, the unit is mA. The default unit is V. 4.80 This parameter indicates the upper limit of signal output of external analog 1. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the accuracy of the measured value may be influenced. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 1 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 1 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 1.
Description:
Remarks:
Lower Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: None If external analog 1 is of the voltage type, the unit is V. If external analog 1 is of the current type, the unit is mA. The default unit is V. 0.96 This parameter indicates the lower limit of signal output of external analog 1. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the accuracy of the measured value may be influenced. It is recommended that you retain the default value.
Description:
1-72
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
The input mode of external analog 1 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Lower Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 1 cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 1.
Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 1 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 60.00 This parameter indicates the upper limit of measurement range for external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the measurement range of the sensor may not be correct. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 1 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Remarks: Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 1 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 1.
Description:
Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 1 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 40.00 This parameter indicates the lower limit of measurement range of the external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the measurement range of the sensor may not be correct. It is recommended that you retain the default value.
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-73
The input mode of external analog 1 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Remarks: Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 1 cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 1.
Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 2 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: None If external analog 2 is of the voltage type, the unit is V. If external analog 2 is of the current type, the unit is mA. The default unit is V. 4.80 This parameter indicates the upper limit of the signal output of external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the accuracy of the measured value may be influenced. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 2 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 2 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 2.
Description:
Remarks:
Lower Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 2 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: None If external analog 2 is of the voltage type, the unit is V. If external analog 2 is of the current type, the unit is mA. The default unit is V. 0.96 This parameter indicates the lower limit of the signal output of external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the accuracy of the measured value may be influenced. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 2 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Lower Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 2 cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 2.
Description:
Remarks:
1-74
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 2 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 60.00 This parameter indicates the upper limit of measurement range for external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the measurement range of the sensor may not be correct. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 2 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Remarks: Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 2 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 2.
Description:
Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 2 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 40.00 This parameter indicates the lower limit of measurement range of the external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the measurement range of the sensor may not be correct. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 2 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Remarks: Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 2 cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 2.
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-75
Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 3 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: None If external analog 3 is of the voltage type, the unit is V. If external analog 3 is of the current type, the unit is mA. The default unit is V. 4.80 This parameter indicates the upper limit of the signal output of external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the accuracy of the measured value may be influenced. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 3 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 3 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 3.
Description:
Remarks:
Description:
Remarks:
Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 3 Value Range: None
1-76
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 60.00 This parameter indicates the upper limit of measurement range for external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the measurement range of the sensor may not be correct. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 3 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Remarks: Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 3 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 3.
Description:
Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 3 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 40.00 This parameter indicates the lower limit of measurement range for external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the measurement range of the sensor may not be correct. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 3 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Remarks: Lower Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 3 cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 3.
Description:
Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 4 Value Range: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-77
If external analog 4 is of the voltage type, the unit is V. Unit: Default Value: If external analog 4 is of the current type, the unit is mA. The default unit is V. 4.80 This parameter indicates the upper limit of the signal output of external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the accuracy of the measured value may be influenced. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 4 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Upper Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 4 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Signal Output of External Analog 4.
Description:
Remarks:
Description:
Remarks:
Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 4 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 60.00
1-78
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates the upper limit of measurement range for external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the measurement range of the sensor may not be correct. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 4 sensor is of two types: voltage and current.
Remarks:
Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 4 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Measurement Range Of External Analog 4.
Lower Limit of Measurement Range Of External Analog 4 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 40.00 This parameter indicates the lower limit of measurement range for external analog sensor. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, the measurement range of the sensor may not be correct. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 4 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Remarks: Lower Limit of Measurement Range Of External Analog 4 cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Measurement Range of External Analog 4.
Description:
Upper Limit of Voltage Alarm for 48V Power Supply Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 4257 V 57 This parameter indicates the upper limit of voltage alarm for 48 V power supply. If the voltage of the 48 V power supply is higher than this parameter, the Abnormal Voltage alarm is generated.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-79
If the environment monitor device uses the 24 V power supply, the alarms corresponding to the 48 V power supply are not reported. Remarks: Upper Limit of Voltage Alarm for 48V Power Supply cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Voltage Alarm for 48V Power Supply.
Lower Limit of Voltage Alarm for 48V Power Supply Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 4257 V 42.00 This parameter indicates the lower limit of voltage alarm for 48 V power supply. If the voltage of the 48 V power supply is lower than this parameter, the Abnormal Voltage alarm is generated. If the environment monitor device uses the 24 V power supply, the alarms corresponding to the 48 V power supply are not reported. Lower Limit of Voltage Alarm for 48V Power Supply cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Voltage Alarm for 48V Power Supply.
Remarks:
Upper Limit of Voltage Alarm for 24V Power Supply Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 2028 V 28.00 This parameter indicates the upper limit of voltage alarm for 24 V power supply. If the voltage of the 24 V power supply is higher than this parameter, the Abnormal Voltage alarm is generated. If the environment monitor device uses the 48 V power supply, the alarms corresponding to the 24 V power supply are not reported. Remarks: Upper Limit of Voltage Alarm for 24V Power Supply cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Voltage Alarm for 24V Power Supply.
Lower Limit of Voltage Alarm for 24V Power Supply Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 2028 V 20.00 This parameter indicates the lower limit of voltage alarm for 24 V power supply. If the voltage of the 24 V power supply is lower than this parameter, the Abnormal Voltage alarm is generated.
1-80
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
If the environment monitor device uses the 48 V power supply, the alarms corresponding to the 24 V power supply are not reported. Lower Limit of Voltage Alarm for 24V Power Supply cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Voltage Alarm for 24V Power Supply.
Upper Limit of Temperature Alarm Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 045 C 45.00 This parameter indicates the upper limit of the temperature alarm. Description: If the temperature of the cabinet where the environment monitor device is located is higher than this parameter, the Abnormal Temperature alarm is generated. Upper Limit of Temperature Alarm cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Temperature Alarm.
Remarks:
Lower Limit of Temperature Alarm Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 045 C 0.00 This parameter indicates the lower limit of the temperature alarm. Description: If the temperature of the cabinet where the environment monitor device is located is lower than this parameter, the Abnormal Temperature alarm is generated. Lower Limit of Temperature Alarm cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Temperature Alarm.
Remarks:
Upper Limit of Humidity Alarm Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 1080 (%) None 80.00 This parameter indicates the upper limit of the humidity alarm. If the ambient humidity of the environment monitor device is higher than this parameter, the Abnormal Humidity alarm is generated. Upper Limit of Humidity Alarm cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Humidity Alarm.
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-81
Lower Limit of Humidity Alarm Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 1080 (%) None 10 This parameter indicates the lower limit of the humidity alarm. If the ambient humidity of the environment monitor device is lower than this parameter, the Abnormal Humidity alarm is generated. Lower Limit of Humidity Alarm cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Humidity Alarm. Remarks: The humidity measurement is not stable, so it is recommended that the difference between Upper Limit of Humidity Alarm and Lower Limit of Humidity Alarm is more than 3%.
Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 1 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 20 This parameter indicates the upper limit of external analog alarm. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, some alarms may not be reported. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 1 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 1 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 1.
Description:
Remarks:
Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 1 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V.
1-82
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
4 This parameter indicates the lower limit of external analog alarm. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, some alarms may not be reported. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 1 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 1 cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 1.
Description:
Remarks:
Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 2 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V Default Value: 20 This parameter indicates the upper limit of external analog alarm. If the value of the analog is higher than the parameter, a corresponding alarm is reported. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, some alarms may not be reported. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 2 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 2 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 2.
Description:
Remarks:
Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 2 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V Default Value: 4
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-83
Description:
This parameter indicates the lower limit of external analog alarm. If the value of the analog is lower than the parameter, a corresponding alarm is reported. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, some alarms may not be reported. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 2 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 2 cannot be greater than Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 2.
Remarks:
Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 3 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V Default Value: 20 This parameter indicates the upper limit of external analog alarm. If the value of the analog is higher than the parameter, a corresponding alarm is reported. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, some alarms may not be reported. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 3 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 3 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 3.
Description:
Remarks:
Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 3 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 4
1-84
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
Remarks:
Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 4 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 20 This parameter indicates the upper limit of external analog alarm. If the value of the analog is higher than the parameter, a corresponding alarm is reported. The parameter is a floating-point value set by the user according to the actual situation. If the parameter is set to an overgreat or oversmall value, some alarms may not be reported. It is recommended that you retain the default value. The input mode of external analog 4 sensor is of two types: voltage and current. Upper Limit of Analog Parameter 4 cannot be smaller than Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 4.
Description:
Remarks:
Lower Limit of Analog Parameter 4 Value Range: None The unit depends on which attribute is to be measured. If temperature is to be measured, the unit is C. Unit: If voltage is to be measured, the unit is V. If humidity is to be measured, the unit is RH%. The default unit is V. Default Value: 4
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-85
Description:
Remarks:
1.2.7 Board Property

SubBoard Property
Only interface boards, such as GXPUM, GXPUC, GEIUB/GOIUB, GEIUP/GOIUP, GEIUT/GOIU, and GEIUA/GOIUA, have subboards. The GEIUx and the GOIUx (x indicates B/P/T/A) provides E1 and optical interfaces respectively. Thus, their subboards have different properties.
SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 011 None None This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the sub-board is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited when the system is running.
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 027 None None This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the sub-board is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited when the system is running.
SubSlot No. Value Range: Unit: 0, 1 None
1-86
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
0 This parameter indicates the number of the subslot where the sub-board is located. 0: subslot number of sub-board 1 1: subslot number of sub-board 2 The GXPU automatically adds CPU sub-board 0. The user is required to configure sub-board 1. The GSCU must exist before the Xpu is created, because the GSCU must perform arbitration.
Description:
Remarks:
The GDPUC can be configured with two DSP sub-boards (subslots 0 and 1) or one EC sub-board. The GEIU can be configured with an E1/T1 sub-board or an E3/T3 sub-board (subslot 0). The GOIU can be configured with an optical subboard (subslot 0).
Work Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: E1, T1 None E1 This parameter indicates the work mode of the port on the sub-board. None
TX C2 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 2 None 2 C2 indicates the multiplexing architecture of the VC frame and the nature of the information payload. None
Expect RX C2 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 2 None 2 C2 indicates the multiplexing architecture of the VC frame and the nature of the information payload. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-87
Tributary Numbering Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Lucent mode, Huawei mode, Alcatel mode None Huawei mode This parameter indicates the sequence of tributaries in an SDH frame. The interconnecting sides of the optical interface must be consistent.
TX J0 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 015 characters None *************** This byte repeatedly sends segment access point identifiers so that the receiving end can check that it is connected with the specified transmitting end. None
Expect RX J0 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 015 characters None *************** This byte repeatedly sends segment access point identifiers so that the receiving end can check that it is connected with the specified transmitting end. None
TX J1 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 015 characters None SBS Huawei 155 J1 repeatedly sends segment access point identifiers of the higher order path so that the receiving end of the path can check that it is connected with the specified transmitting end. None
1-88
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Expect RX J1 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 015 characters None SBS Huawei 155 J1 repeatedly sends segment access point identifiers of the higher order path so that the receiving end of the path can check that it is connected with the specified transmitting end. None
Set TX S1 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the S1 byte is enabled. None
TX S1 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 015 None 0 This parameter indicates the synchronization status byte. None
TX K1 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 0 This parameter indicates the automatic protection switchback (APS) path byte K1. None
TX K2 Byte Value Range: Unit: 0255 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-89
0 This parameter indicates the automatic protection switchback (APS) path byte K2. None
DspTc Property
G711 Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: A0, U1 None A0 A/U law configuration, 0A law (default), 1U law In terms of hardware, the A interface supports various interfaces, such as E1/T1, so the corresponding coding schemes vary. The TC is required to support different interfaces, so the type of the interface is configured based on the actual situation.
Remarks:
Idle Code Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0-255 None 84 This parameter indicates the idle code of the A interface. It is used for the interconnection of the A interfaces. For the compatibility with the A interfaces from different manufacturers, this parameter can be configured.
Crc Switch Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Open, Close None Close This parameter indicates the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) switch. Apart from being configured in the CM, the CRC is triggered through the channel activation message by the RC. Remarks: The CRC function is active only when the CM is configured with this function and the RC assignment channel enables this function. For the compatibility with BTSs, the CRC function can be set to on or off.
1-90
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Mute Detect Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Open, Close None Close The user sets the function of one-way audio check on the BSC. If the function is enabled, the BSC notifies the DPU to perform one-way audio check when a call is established. Apart from being configured in the CM, the one-way audio check is triggered through the channel activation message by the RC. The function is active only when the CM is configured with this function and the RC enables this function during channel assignment.
Remarks:
Mute Timer Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 5 This parameter indicates the duration of the one-way audio check. Description: The user sets the function on the BSC. If the function is enabled, the BSC notifies the DPU to check the duration of the one-way audio check when a call is established. Apart from being configured in the CM, the function is triggered through the channel activation message by the RC. The function is active only when the CM is configured with this function and the RC enables this function during channel assignment.
Remarks:
Noise Detect Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Open, Close None Close The user sets the function of noise detection on the BSC. If the function is enabled, the BSC notifies the DPU to detect noises when a call is established. Apart from being configured in the CM, the function is triggered through the channel activation message by the RC. The function is active only when the CM is configured with this function and the RC enables this function during channel assignment.
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-91
TFO Switch Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Open, Close None Close Tandem free operation (TFO) switch The function of TFO voice enhancement can be triggered based on the user's requirements.
AEC Switch Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Open, Close None Close This parameter indicates the acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) functional switch is switched on or switched off. The function of AEC voice enhancement can be triggered based on the user's requirements.
AEC Pure Delay Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 100255 Milliseconds 140 This parameter indicates the duration between the transmission of voices from the AEC to the MS and the reception of the echoes from the MS to the AEC. The acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) must predict the duration. Generally, the duration is greater than 120 milliseconds. Remarks: The function of AEC voice enhancement can be triggered based on the user's requirements.
Description:
AEC Back Wastage Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 340 (3 dB to 40 dB) None 24
1-92
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the loss between the voices and the echoes. The acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) can determine whether the returned voices are echoes according to this parameter. Description: For example, if the parameter is set to 20 dB, the AEC considers that the loss between the voices and the returned voices is at least 20 dB. If the loss is smaller than 20 dB, the AEC does not consider the returned voices as echoes and the AEC does not cancel the returned voices. Therefore, this parameter is actually configured to a network empirical value. It cannot be too small. If the returned loss is configured to an over-small value, the audio on both ends will be discontinuous. Remarks: The function of AEC voice enhancement can be triggered based on the user's requirements.
ALC Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Pass, Fixed, Auto None Fixed This parameter is used to set the adaptive level control (ALC) mode. Description: Pass: transparent transmission mode Fixed: fixed gain mode Auto: auto gain mode Transparent transmission mode: The ALC is not functional. Fixed gain mode: The fixed gain consists of forward gain and reverse gain. The rate adjustment factor and the expected level are not functional. Auto gain mode: The gain is automatic and it can be adjusted based on the first several frames. Both the rate adjustment factor and the expected level are functional.
Remarks:
ALC FWD Gain Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 012 None 6 Uplink adaptive level control (ALC) forward fixed gain This parameter is used in fixed gain mode.
ALC RVS Gain Value Range: Unit: 012 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-93
6 Downlink adaptive level control (ALC) reverse fixed gain This parameter is used in fixed gain mode.
ALC Rate Adjust Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1100 None 10 This parameter is used to set the adjustment speed of the gain by the ALC software. If the value of the parameter is great, the gain is adjusted slowly. This parameter is used in auto gain mode.
ALC Level Expect Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1100 (dB value range: 30 dB to 10 dB) None 50 (20 dB) This parameter indicates the expected level of the output signal after gain adjustment. This parameter is used in auto gain mode.
ALC VAD Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1100 (dB value range: 40 dB to 20 dB) None 10 This parameter indicates the detection threshold of voice signals. Description: Set a threshold according to this parameter to prevent the adaptive level control (ALC) from amplifying ordinary noises. The ALC is started only when the energy exceeds a certain value (someone is speaking). Remarks: This parameter is used in auto gain mode.
ANR Switch Value Range: Unit: On, Off None
1-94
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Off This parameter indicates whether the adaptive noise restrain (ANR) switch is switched on or switched off. None
SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 012 None None Number of the subrack where the DSP TC is located Acting as a key attribute of the DSP TC object, this parameter is automatically calculated when a DSP sub-board is created.
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 027 None None Number of the slot where the DSP TC is located Acting as a key attribute of the DSP TC object, this parameter is automatically calculated when a DSP sub-board is created.
Dsp No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 021 None None Number of the DSP TC on the board Acting as a key attribute of the DSP TC object, this parameter is automatically calculated when a DSP sub-board is created. Each DSP TC matches one DSP. Remarks: The DSP manages physical equipment and the DSPTC manages services. If the DSP is not configured with a DSPTC object, the DSP chip still runs normally based on the default value. But the DSP cannot manage services.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-95
Attributes of the Ports on the EIUa Board

SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 011 None None This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the board is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited when the system is running. None
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 027 None None Number of the slot where the board is located None
Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031. None None None None
Work Mode Value Range: E1, T1
1-96
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None E1 Work mode of the port None
Loop Mode NOLOOP Value Range: LOADLOOP Remote Loop LOCALLOOP Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: None NOLOOP None Switchover between loopback state and non-loopback state is allowed. Switchover between non-loopback states is prohibited.
Frame Format DOUBLE_FRAME Value Range: CRC4_MULTIFRAME SUPER_FRAME EXTENDED_SUPER_FRAME Unit: Default Value: Description: None DOUBLE_FRAME in E1 mode SUPER_FRAME in T1 mode None Only DOUBLE_FRAME and CRC4_MULTIFRAME are supported if the work mode is E1. Only SUPER_FRAME and EXTENDED_SUPER_FRAME are supported if the work mode is T1.
Remarks:
Line Code Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: HDB3 None HDB3 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-97
Remarks:
Only HDB3 and AMI are supported if the work mode is E1. Only B8ZS and AMI are supported if the work mode is T1.
Alarm Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 01 None 0 The value 0 indicates that no alarm is reported. The value 1 indicates that an alarm is reported. An alarm is reported Through only the configured port.
Attributes of the Ports on the OIUa Board

Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 011 None None This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the board is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited when the system is running. None
Subrack No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None None
1-98
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the board is located. This number is fixed in the system operation. None
Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 062 for STM1_E1 083 for STM1_T1 None None None None
Work mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: E1, T1 None E1 Work mode of the port None
Alarm Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 01 None 0 0: No (Alarms are not reported) 1: Yes (Alarm are reported) Alarms are reported only through specified ports.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-99
TX Frame Format Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: DOUBLE_FRAME, CRC4_MULTIFRAME, SUPER_FRAME, EXTENDED_SUPER_FRAME None DOUBLE_FRAME in E1 mode SUPER_FRAME in T1 mode None Values DOUBLE_FRAME and CRC4_MULTIFRAME are supported when the port is in E1 work mode. Values SUPER_FRAME and EXTENDED_SUPER_FRAME are supported when the port is in T1 work mode.
Remarks:
RX Frame Format Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: DOUBLE_FRAME, CRC4_MULTIFRAME, SUPER_FRAME, EXTENDED_SUPER_FRAME None DOUBLE_FRAME in E1 mode SUPER_FRAME in T1 mode None Values DOUBLE_FRAME and CRC4_MULTIFRAME are supported when the port is in E1 work mode. Values SUPER_FRAME and EXTENDED_SUPER_FRAME are supported when the port is in T1 work mode.
Remarks:
TX J2 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: A string of 0 to 15 characters None *************** J2 is a low-order access point identifier repeatedly sent. The contents in J2 are negotiated by the sender and the receiver. The J2 is used for the receiver to confirm whether the sender is in connection state on the specific path. The sent J2 must be consistent with the received J2 expected by the peer end. Otherwise, the communications will be affected and an alarm will be generated.
Description:
Remarks:
1-100
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Expect RX J2 Byte Value Range: Unit: Default Value: A string of 0 to 15 characters None *************** J2 is a low-order access point identifier repeatedly sent. The contents in J2 are negotiated by the sender and the receiver. The J2 is used for the receiver to confirm whether the sender is in connection state on the specific path. The expected received J2 must be consistent with the J2 sent from the peer end; otherwise, the communications will be affected and an alarm will be generated.
Description:
Remarks:
1.3 Other Property Parameters

1.3.1 SS7 Signaling Points
OSP
OSP Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 03 None None The original signaling point (OSP) index indicates a unique number of an OSP in the OSP table. This parameter is used to label an OSP record in the OSP table. This parameter is mandatory.
OSP Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 1 to 49 characters None 1 This parameter is used to label an OSP. Each OSP configured in the OSP table has a name. The default name is 1. No duplicate name is allowed.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-101
OPC (Hex) If the NI is 0, the value range of a 24-bit OPC is 0x10xFFFFF1, and the value range of a 14-bit OPC is 0x10x03FF1. If the NI is not 0, the value range of a 24-bit OPC is 0x10xFFFFFF, and the value range of a 14-bit OPC is 0x10x03FFF. None None In the signaling network, each OSP has a code (OPC). The OSP is called local office OSP. The code identifies the local office OSP in the signaling network. If the NI is equal to 0, the value range (0xFFFFDE0xFFFFFF) of the 24-bit OPC is for internal use, and so does the value range (0x3FDE0x3FFF) of the 14-bit OPC.
Value Range:
Unit: Default Value: Description:
Remarks:
Net Structure Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 14 Bit, 24 Bit None 24 Bit This parameter indicates the coding scheme used for a signaling point in the signaling network. None
Network Indication Value Range: Unit: Default Value: INT, INTB, NAT, NATB None 0 This parameter indicates the type of signaling network where a signaling point is located. Description: INT: international network INTB: international standby network NAT: national network NATB: national standby network Remarks: None
1-102
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
STP
STP Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 149 characters None None This parameter indicates the name of the STP. It is used to identify the STP. The parameter cannot be duplicate with the existing STP name or DSP name.
STPC (Hex) If the NI is equal to 0, the value range of a 24-bit STPC is 0x10xFFFFF1, and the value range of a 14-bit STPC is 0x10x03FF1. If the NI is not equal to 0, the value range of a 24-bit STPC is 0x10xFFFFFF, and the value range of a 14-bit STPC is 0x10x03FFF. None None In the signaling network, one DSP must detect the DPC before communicating with another DSP. The DPC identifies the signaling points that can communicate with the local office. The STPC cannot be duplicate with the existing OPC, STPC, or DPC. The parameter can be set only when an STP is added. Remarks: When the NI is equal to 0, the value range (0xFFFFDE0xFFFFFF) of the 24-bit STPC is for internal use, so does the value range (0x3FDE0x3FFF) of the 14-bit STPC.
Value Range:
Description:
Name of the Signaling Point Transferred to Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 149 characters None None This parameter indicates the name of the signaling point transferred to. The parameter is automatically set by the system. It can be viewed only. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-103
DSP
DSP Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 03 None None This parameter indicates a unique number of a destination signaling point (DSP) in the DSP table. This parameter is used to label a DSP record in the DSP table. None
DSP Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 150 characters None None This parameter indicates a DSP in the DSP table. The default OSP name is 1. No duplicate name is allowed.
DPC(Hex) If the NI is equal to 0, the value range of a 24-bit DPC is 0x10xFFFFF1, and the value range of a 14-bit DPC is 0x10x03FF1. If the NI is not equal to 0, the value range of a 24-bit DPC is 0x10xFFFFFF, and the value range of a 14-bit DPC is 0x10x03FFF. None None In the signaling network, one DSP must detect the DPC of another DSP before communicating with the DSP. The DPC uniquely identifies the signaling point that can communicate with the local office. When the NI is equal to 0, the value range (0xFFFFDE0xFFFFFF) of the 24-bit DPC is for internal use, and so does the value range (0x3FDE0x3FFF) of the 14-bit DPC.
Value Range:
Remarks:
Using STP Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No
1-104
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates whether the current DSP uses a destination signaling transfer point (STP). When the BSC is not configured with STP, the parameter cannot be set to Yes. The parameter can be set only when a DSP is added. None
Remarks:
1.3.2 Inter-Subrack Link

Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None None One BSC has only one set of links between subracks. Description: The BSC allocates a unique index to the set of inter-subrack links by calling a specific algorithm. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created and deleted by the system. Remarks: After being reset, the BSC regenerates a set of links between subracks and assigns a new value to the set.
SubRack1 No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 011 None 0 Number of the subrack on one side of the link. The BSC6000 has three types of subracks: GMPS, GEPS, and GTCS. The GMPS and GEPS subracks are generally called BM subracks. Paths can be established between the subracks of only the same type, for example, between BM subracks, or between GTCSs.
Remarks:
SubRack2 No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 011 None 0 Number of the subrack on the other side of the link
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-105
Remarks:
The BSC6000 has three types of subracks: GMPS, GEPS, and GTCS. The GMPS and GEPS subracks are generally called BM subracks. Paths can be established between the subracks of only the same type, for example, between BM subracks, or between GTCSs.
SubRack1 TDM No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 05 None 0 Each subrack has six TDM ports, numbered 05. This parameter indicates the number of the TDM port (at one end the inter-subrack link) in subrack 1. Each subrack can be connected with a maximum of three subracks. Each pair of subracks is connected by two TDM links for load sharing.
Remarks:
SubRack2 TDM No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 05 None 0 Each subrack has six TDM ports, numbered 05. This parameter indicates the number of the TDM port (at one end the inter-subrack link) in subrack 2. Each subrack can be connected with a maximum of three subracks. Each pair of subracks is connected by two TDM links for load sharing.
Remarks:
1.3.3 PCU
PCU No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None None The packet control unit (PCU) provides GPRS/EDGE services. Each PCU has a unique number in the BSC. The number is configurable, but cannot be blank. A configured PCU number cannot be changed. A maximum of 32 PCUs can be configured in one BSC.
1-106
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
PCU Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 1 to 50 characters None None This parameter identifies a PCU. The PCU name is configurable. Modifying this parameter is allowed. The PCU name cannot be duplicated or left blank.
1.3.4 Semipermanent Link

Semipermanent Link Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 065535 None None This parameter uniquely identifies a semi-permanent link in the BSC. This parameter is generated by the system. Remarks: The index cannot be duplicate or modified. This parameter is created or deleted together with the semi-permanent link.
Rate Type 8 kbit/s Value Range: 16 kbit/s 32 kbit/s 64 kbit/s Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: None 64 kbit/s Transmission rate of the semi-permanent link This parameter can be modified based on your actual requirements.
In BSC Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None 0
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-107
Description:
The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 port when coming into the BSC. This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the E1 port is located. This parameter can be modified based on your actual requirement, but the subrack whose number is to be modified must be a configured one.
Remarks:
In BSC Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 027 None None The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 port when coming into the BSC. The E1 port is on a GEIU or GOIU. This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIU or GOIU is located. This parameter can be modified based on your actual requirement, but the slot whose number is to be modified must be preset for a configured GEIU or GOIU.
Description:
Remarks:
In BSC Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 062 None None The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 port when coming into the BSC. This parameter indicates the E1 port number. Description: When the semi-permanent link is configured on a GEIU, the GEIU has 32 E1 ports, numbered 031. When the semi-permanent link is configured on a GOIU, the GOIU has 63 E1 ports, numbered 062. This parameter cannot indicate an occupied E1 port. Remarks: If all semi-permanent links are configured on one GEIU or GOIU, the In BSC Port No. and Out BSC Port No. parameters must be configured for different E1 ports.
In BSC Timeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 131 None None
1-108
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 timeslot when coming into the BSC. This parameter indicates the E1 timeslot number. Generally, an E1 link has 32 timeslots. Timeslot 0 is used for synchronization. This parameter cannot indicate an occupied timeslot.
Remarks:
In BSC Sub-Timeslot Start No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 07 None None The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 sub-timeslot when coming into the BSC. This parameter indicates the sub- timeslot number. Each timeslot consists of eight sub-timeslots, numbered 07. This parameter cannot indicate an occupied sub-timeslot.
Out BSC SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None 0 The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 port when going out of the BSC. This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the E1 port is located. For details, see the In BSC SubRack No. parameter. Remarks: None
Description:
Out BSC Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 027 None None The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 port when going out of the BSC. The E1 port is located on a GEIU. This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIU is located. For details, see the In BSC Slot No. parameter. Remarks: None
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-109
Out BSC Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 062 None None The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 port when going out of the BSC. This parameter indicates the E1 port number. Description: When the semi-permanent link is configured on a GEIU, the GEIU has 32 E1 ports, numbered 031. When the semi-permanent link is configured on a GOIU, the GOIU has 63 E1 ports, numbered 062. This parameter cannot indicate the occupied E1 port. Remarks: If all the semi-permanent links are configured on one GEIU or GOIU, the In BSC Port No. and Out BSC Port No. parameters must be configured for different E1 ports.
Out BSC Timeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 131 None None The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 timeslot when going out of the BSC. This parameter indicates the E1 timeslot number. Generally, an E1 link has 32 timeslots. Timeslot 0 is used for synchronization. This parameter cannot indicate an occupied timeslot.
Description:
Remarks:
Out-BSC Sub-Timeslot Start No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 07 None None The semi-permanent link occupies an E1 sub-timeslot when going out of the BSC. This parameter indicates the sub- timeslot number. Each timeslot consists of eight sub-timeslots, numbered 07. This parameter cannot indicate an occupied sub-timeslot.
1-110
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1.3.5 Pb Signaling Link

Logic No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None None This parameter indicates an index of a logical link. It is automatically generated by the BSC. It uniquely indicates a Pb signaling link in the BSC. Modifying this parameter is not allowed. The parameter is added or deleted together with the Pb signaling link. Remarks: None
Description:
SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None 0 A Pb signaling link is carried by an E1 cable over the Pb interface. The E1 cable is connected with a GEIUP or GOIUP. Description: This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the GEIUP or GOIUP is located. Modifying this parameter is not allowed. The parameter is deleted together with the Pb signaling link. Remarks: None
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 027 None 0 A Pb signaling link is carried by an E1 cable over the Pb interface. The E1 cable is connected with a GEIUP or GOIUP. This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIUP or GOIUP is located. Modifying this parameter is not allowed. The parameter is deleted together with the Pb signaling link. Remarks: None
Description:
Port No. Value Range: 062
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-111
None 0 This parameter indicates the number of the port connected with the E1 cable.
Description:
If the current interface board is a GEIU, the ports on the GEIU are numbered 031. If the current interface board is a GOIU, the ports on the GOIU are numbered 062.
Remarks:
Modifying this parameter is not allowed. The parameter is deleted together with the Pb signaling link.
Timeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 131 None 1 This parameter indicates the number of the E1 timeslot transmitted on a Pb signaling link over the Pb interface. Generally, an E1 link has 32 timeslots. Timeslot 0 is specially used for synchronization. Description: The transmission rate of each timeslot is 64 kbit/s. One timeslot generally consists of eight sub-timeslots (the transmission rate of each sub-timeslot is 8 kbit/s) or four sub-timeslots (the transmission rate of each sub-timeslot is 16 kbit/s). This parameter cannot be blank. You can modify the Timeslot No. of only idle E1 timeslots on the same GEIUP or GOIUP. Remarks: This parameter cannot indicate an occupied sub-timeslot.
TEI Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0127 None 63 This parameter indicates a terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) on the link layer. It is used to distinguish multiple signaling links on one physical link when highway timeslots are multiplexed on an LAPD link. None
Trunk Device Type Value Range: 0
1-112
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None 0 This parameter indicates the type of a trunk device. 0: GEIU interface board (or GEIU interface board) None
Congestion Start Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 30100 None 90 This parameter is also referred to as flow control start threshold. The Pb signaling link is based on the LAPD protocol between the BSC and the PCU. The congestion status of the logical link is measured according to the length of the queue of frame I. If the queue is long, the link is congested. If the length of the queue exceeds the congestion start threshold, the link is overloaded. Then all the downlink paging messages and all the uplink channel request messages are discarded. During the link recovery, if the length of the queue is greater than the congestion end threshold but smaller than or equal to the congestion start threshold, the paging messages of the short message service are discarded. If the length of the queue is smaller than or equal to the congestion end threshold, no message is discarded. Then the flow control stops. If the start threshold is excessively high, the flow control will be delayed and the Pb signaling link cannot work normally. If the end threshold is excessively high, the congestion control will be ended ahead of time. Thus the result of the congestion control is poor and the Pb signaling link cannot work normally. The difference between the congestion start threshold and the congestion end threshold cannot be too small. If the difference is too small, the Pb signaling link will not work normally and the flow control will be frequently started. LAPD: Link Access Procedure on the D channel Remarks: The congestion start threshold must be greater than the congestion end threshold.
Description:
Congestion End Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 2090 None 60
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-113
This parameter is also referred to as flow control end threshold. For details, see the Congestion Start Threshold parameter. None
Transmission Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Terrestrial transmission Satellite transmission None None The Pb signaling links work in two transmission modes: terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission. For the areas such as deserts and lakes, you can use the satellite transmission mode. This parameter requires a license.
Description:
Remarks:
1.3.6 Ater Signaling Link

Ater Connection Path Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0254 None None The GMPS or GEPS communicates with the GCTS through a signaling link. Each link has an index. This parameter indicates the index of the link established on the Ater interface. Value range 0254 is valid, but value 255 indicates that the index is invalid.
Description:
Remarks:
Link Rate Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 64Kbit/s, 2Mbit/s None None
1-114
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the work mode of a signaling link. Description: 64Kbit/s: Indicates that a 64 kbit/s link is configured. The transmission rate of the signaling link is 64 kbit/s. 2Mbit/s: Indicates that a 2 Mbit/s link is configured (the transmission rate of the signaling link varies between 64 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s). The transmission bandwidth is specified in the Timeslot Mask. None
Remarks:
Timeslot Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 00000000000000000000000000000010 to 111111111111111111111111111111110 None None This parameter indicates the E1/T1 timeslot carried by an Ater signaling link. Description: For the 32 timeslots on an E1/T1 port, if an Ater signaling link occupies a certain timeslot, then set the bit of the timeslot to 1. When the transmission rate of the Ater signaling link is 64 kbit/s, only one bit of the timeslot mask can be set to 1. When the transmission rate of the Ater signaling link is 2 Mbit/s, multiple bits of the timeslot mask can be set to 1. Remarks: Timeslot 0 cannot be occupied because it is for synchronization.
Satellite Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None None Currently two types of signaling links are used: satellite links and non-satellite links. The difference between the two types of links is that non-satellite links work in the basic error correction mode while satellite links work in the preventive cyclic error correction mode. No: Non-satellite links are used and they work in the basic error correction mode. Yes: Satellite links are used and they work in the preventive cyclic error correction mode. Remarks: Generally, non-satellite links are used.
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-115
1.3.7 Ater Path

Ater Connection Path Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0254 None None Index of the path between the GMPS (or a GEPS) and a GTCS None
BM SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 011 None None This parameter indicates the number of the local subrack (GMPS or GEPS) on one end of the Ater path. None
BM Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 027 None None This parameter indicates the slot number in the local subrack (GMPS or GEPS) on the other end of the Ater path. None
BM Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 062 None None This parameter indicates the number of the port connected with the Ater path on the local subrack (GMPS or GEPS) side. If the interface board is an E1 interface board, the value range is 031. Remarks: If the interface board is an optical interface board, the value range is 062.
1-116
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
TC SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 011 None None This parameter indicates the number of the remote subrack (GTCS) on the other end of the Ater path. None
TC Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 027 None None This parameter indicates the slot number in the remote subrack (TC subrack) on the other end of the Ater path. None
TC Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 062 None None This parameter indicates the number of the port connected with the Ater path on the remote GTCS side. When the current interface board is an E1 interface board, the value range of the E1 port is 031. When the current interface board is an STM-1 interface board, the value range of the E1 port is 062.
Remarks:
1.3.8 SS7 Link

Link No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 015 None None Identifies an SS7 link None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-117
Ater Connection Path Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0254 None None Each subrack or slot where the signaling points and signaling links are located has a unique index. This parameter indicates the index of the path on the Ater interface. None
Ater Timeslot Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 00000000000000000000000000000010 to 11111111111111111111111111111110 None None This parameter indicates the E1/T1 timeslot occupied by the Ater signaling link. Description: For the 32 timeslots on the E1/T1 port, if the Ater signaling link occupies a timeslot, set the bit of this timeslot to 1. When the transmission rate of the Ater signaling link is 64 kbit/s, only one bit of the timeslot mask can be set to 1. When the transmission rate of the Ater signaling link is 2 Mbit/s, multiple bits of the timeslot mask can be set to 1. Remarks: Timeslot 0 cannot be occupied because it is for synchronization.
Link Rate Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 64Kbit/s, 2Mbit/s None None This parameter indicates the work mode of a signaling link. A 64 kbit/s signaling link and a 2 Mbit/s signaling link cannot work concurrently on one Ater interface.
A SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None None
1-118
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
Each subrack or slot where the signaling points and signaling links are located has a unique index. This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the GEIUA/GOIUA is located. None
Remarks:
A Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 027 None None Each subrack or slot where the signaling points and signaling links are located has a unique index. This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIUA/GOIUA is located. None
Description:
Remarks:
A Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 062 None None This parameter indicates the number of the port on the board where the A interface signaling link is located. Description: When an E1 interface board is used, the value range of the port is 031. When an STM-1 interface board is used, the value range of the port is 062. Remarks: None
A Timeslot Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1-0XFFFFFFFE None None A timeslot mask indicates an E1/T1 timeslot (on the A interface) occupied by the SS7 link. Description: For the 32 timeslots on the E1/T1 port, if the SS7 link occupies a timeslot, set the bit of the timeslot to 1. This parameter indicates the timeslot occupied by the signaling link on the A interface. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-119
GXPUM Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 013 None None A subrack has 28 slots. The GXPUM board can be inserted into any of the 28 slots. This parameter indicates the number of the slot of the functional GXPUM that carries the SS7 link. Slot numbers are classified into logical numbers and physical numbers. Remarks: When you configure an SS7 link, you need to specify the number of the logical slot where the XPU is located.
Description:
SLC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None None This parameter identifies an SS7 link between directly connected signaling points. Description: In the signaling network, signaling points communicate with each other through signaling links. The signaling links between directly connected signaling points are distinguished by signaling link codes. The SLC is unique.
Remarks:
SLC Send Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None None If the signaling link is faulty, messages are transmitted and received in the form of false messages during the fault location. This parameter identifies the signaling link through which messages are transmitted and received. None
Description:
Remarks:
Priority Value Range: Unit: 0254 None
1-120
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
None Each configured signaling link has a priority. Only the link with the highest priority can bear services. Value 0 refers to the highest priority. This parameter indicates the priority of a signaling link for bearing services. Services only run on the link with the highest priority. If multiple links are configured, only one link has the highest priority and can bear services. The other links cannot bear services and load sharing cannot be achieved.
Description:
Remarks:
Satellite Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None None Currently two types of signaling links are used: satellite links and non-satellite links. The difference between the two types of links is that non-satellite links work in the basic error correction mode while satellite links work in the preventive cyclic error correction mode. No: Non-satellite links are used and they work in the basic error correction mode. Yes: Satellite links are used and they work in the preventive cyclic error correction mode. Remarks: Generally, non-satellite links are used.
Description:
Congestion Start Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1100 None 80 If a signaling link is overloaded, it may be congested. Description: This parameter indicates the congestion start threshold at layer 3 of signaling link. It controls the link congestion and notifies the upper-layer link of the signaling link congestion. The value of the Congestion Start Threshold parameter must be greater than that of the Congestion End Threshold parameter. For details, see the Congestion End Threshold parameter.
Remarks:
Congestion End Threshold Value Range: 0100
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-121
None 70 If the signaling link is overloaded, it may be congested. This parameter indicates the congestion end threshold at layer 3 of the signaling link. It controls the link congestion and notifies the upper-layer link of the signaling link congestion. The value of the Congestion End Threshold parameter must be smaller than that of the Congestion Start Threshold parameter. For details, see the Congestion Start Threshold parameter.
Description:
Remarks:
Test Code Length Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 115 Bytes 6 After the A interface starts to work, a signaling link test message is transmitted on the signaling link at an interval of one minute to test whether the signaling link is active. The message contains a test code. This parameter indicates the length of the test code. Remarks: None
Description:
Test Code Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 165 After the A interface starts to work, a signaling link test message is transmitted on the signaling link at an interval of one minute to test whether the signaling link is active. The message contains a test code. This parameter indicates the value of each byte in the test code. Remarks: None
Description:
1.3.9 Timeslots on the E1 Interface

A Interface E1
SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: 011 None
1-122
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the GEIUA or GOIUA board is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the A interface.
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 027 None None This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIUA or GOIUA is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the A interface.
Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 062 None None This parameter indicates the number of the port (on the GEIUA or GOIUA) connected with the E1 cable. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. A unique E1 link on the A interface is determined by the subrack number, slot number, and port number. If the current interface board is a GEIUA, the value range of the port number is 031. If the current interface board is a GOIUA, the value range of the port number is 062. Remarks: This parameter cannot indicate an occupied E1 port.
Description:
Start CIC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-123
A circuit identity code (CIC) indicates a unique timeslot that is used to transmit voice signals. The start CIC identifies E1 timeslot 0. If the start CIC increases by 1, E1 timeslot 1 is indicated. If the start CIC increases by 2, E1 timeslot 2 is indicated. You can increase the start CIC in an ascending order until E1 timeslot 31 is indicated. Modifying this parameter is allowed. The 32 E1 timeslots on the A interface have three states: occupied, CIC, and idle. Timeslot 0 is used for special purposes and it is always in the occupied state. This parameter cannot indicate a start CIC in either of the following cases: Remarks: The start CIC is identical with the existing CIC. The start CIC is not identical with the existing CIC, but the CICs of the other 31 timeslots calculated from the start CIC are identical with the existing CICs.
Description:
Ater Interface E1
Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None None This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the Ater interface. The BSC6000 has three types of subracks: GMPS, GEPS, and GTCS. The GMPS and GEPS are generally called BM subracks. The BM subracks must be configured with signaling points.
Description:
Remarks:
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 027 None None This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the Ater interface.
Description:
1-124
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
The BSC6000 has three types of subracks: GMPS, GEPS, and GTCS. The GMPS and GEPS subracks are generally called BM subracks. The BM subracks must be configured with signaling points.
Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 062 None 0 This parameter indicates the number of the port connected with the E1 cable on the Ater interface. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. A unique E1 link on the Ater interface is determined by the subrack number, slot number, and port number. If the current interface board is a GEIU, the value range of the port number is 031. If the current interface board is a GOIU, the value range of the port number is 062. Remarks: This parameter cannot indicate an occupied E1 port.
Description:
Pb Interface E1
Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None None This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the GEIUP or GOIUP is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the Pb interface. None
Description:
Remarks:
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 027 None None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-125
Description:
This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIUP or GOIUP is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the Pb interface. None
Remarks:
Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 062 None None This parameter indicates the number of the port connected with the E1 cable. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the Pb interface. Description: A unique E1 link on the Pb interface is determined by a subrack number, slot number, and port number. If the current interface board is a GEIU, the value range of the port number is 031. If the current interface board is a GOIU, the value range of the port number is 062. Remarks: This parameter cannot indicate an occupied E1 port.
Start PCIC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None None A packet circuit identity code (PCIC) indicates a unique voice timeslot. An E1 link on the Pb interface has 128 timeslots and the transmission rate of each timeslot is 16 kbit/s. The start PCIC corresponds to E1 timeslot 0. If the start PCIC increases by 1, E1 timeslot 1 is indicated. If the start PCIC increases by 2, E1 timeslot 2 is indicated. You can increase the start PCIC in an ascending order until E1 timeslot 127 is indicated. Modifying this parameter is allowed. The 128 E1 timeslots on the Pb interface have three states: occupied, PCIC, and idle. If a timeslot is in idle state, the timeslot cannot be used. Logically, the idle state is the same as the occupied state.
Description:
1-126
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter cannot indicate a start PCIC in either of the following cases: Remarks: The start PCIC is identical with the existing PCIC. The start PCIC is not identical with the existing PCIC, but the PCICs of the other 127 timeslots calculated from the start PCIC are identical with the existing CICs.
Transport Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Terrestrial transmission, Satellite transmission None Terrestrial transmission This parameter indicates the transmission type of the E1 link on the Pb interface. Description: The E1 link on the Pb interface can work in two transmission modes: terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission. For the areas such as deserts and lakes, you can use the satellite transmission mode. Remarks: None
PCU No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None None Number of the PCU that the E1 link on the Pb interface is connected to The PCU must be configured.
PCU Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 0 to 49 characters None None PCU name None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-127
Abis Interface E1
Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None None This parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the GEIUB or GOIUB is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the Abis interface. None
Description:
Remarks:
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 027 None None This parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIUB or GOIUB is located. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. The parameter is created or deleted together with the E1 link on the Abis interface. None
Description:
Remarks:
Port No. If the current interface board is a GEIUB, the value range of the port number is 031. If the current interface board is a GOIUB, the value range of the port number is 062. None None Physically, a signaling link is carried by an E1 cable on the Abis interface. This parameter indicates the number of the port connected with the E1 cable. Modifying this parameter is prohibited. A unique E1 link on the Abis interface is determined by the subrack number, slot number, and port number. Remarks: This parameter cannot indicate an occupied E1 port.
Value Range:
Description:
1-128
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Timeslot
Timeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None None Generally, an E1 interface (with the transmission rate of 2.048 Mbit/s) has 32 timeslots, numbered 031. Timeslot 0 is specially used for synchronization. The transmission rate of each timeslot is 64 kbit/s. None
Subtimeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 None None One E1 timeslot generally consists of eight sub-timeslots (the transmission rate of each sub-timeslot is 8 kbit/s) or four sub-timeslots (the transmission rate of each sub-timeslot is 16 kbit/s). The eight sub-timeslots are numbered 07 and the four sub-timeslots are numbered 03. Remarks: None
Description:
Timeslot Type The type of E1 timeslots varies with the type of logical interfaces. A interface: ASL, CIC, NULL, and Semicon Value Range: Ater interface: AterOML, AterSL, ASL, CIC, NULL, Semicon, and SimeTs Pb interface: CIC, NULL, PbSL, Semicon, and SimeTs Abis interface: OML, RSL, Sime, Idle, Chan, NULL, Semicon, and SimeTs Unit: Default Value: None None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-129
This parameter indicates the function and status of a timeslot. The CIC type indicates a traffic timeslot. The NULL type indicates that this timeslot is not available. The Semicon type indicates that this timeslot is a semi-permanent link timeslot. The SimeTs type indicates that this timeslot is a monitoring timeslot of a BTS. The ASL type of the A interface indicates that the timeslot is an ASL timeslot, that is, A interface signaling link timeslot (SS7 link timeslot). The AterOML type of the Ater interface indicates that the timeslot is an Ater OML timeslot. The AterSL type of the Ater interface indicates that the timeslot is an Ater signaling link timeslot. Description: The ASL type of the Ater interface indicates that the timeslot is an ASL timeslot. It is used to transmit the signaling (SS7) on the A interface. The PbSL type of the Pb interface indicates that the timeslot is a Pb signaling timeslot. The OML type of the Abis interface indicates that the timeslot is an OML timeslot, that is, OML timeslot of the BTS. The RSL type of the Abis interface indicates that the timeslot is an RSL timeslot, that is, signaling link timeslot of TRXs. The Sime type of the Abis interface indicates that the timeslot is a Sime timeslot, that is, a monitoring timeslot. The Idle type of the Abis interface indicates that the timeslot is an idle timeslot. The Chan type of the Abis interface indicates that the timeslot is a traffic channel timeslot of TRXs. Remarks: None
1.3.10 Ater OML

Logic Group No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None None Index of a logical HDLC link Logical HDLC links are used to manage physical HDLC links. One logical HDLC link manages a maximum of two physical HDLC links.
Ater Connection Path Index Value Range: 0254
1-130
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None None This parameter indicates the index of the path between a local subrack and a remote subrack, that is, the index of the path used by the logical HDLC link. None
Timeslot Mask Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 000000000000000000000000000111110 to 11111111111111111111111111111110 None None Number of the timeslot on the HDLC link A timeslot number consists of 32 bits. Each bit corresponds to one timeslot. If a bit is set to 1, infer that the timeslot is in use. If a bit is set to 0, infer that the timeslot cannot be used. Timeslot 0 cannot be used and must be set to 0. Timeslot 1 is permanently used by the control link and must be set to 1. Remarks: Apart from timeslots 0 and 1, at least four neighboring timeslots must be configured among the remaining 30 timeslots. The number of the timeslots in use among the 30 timeslots determines the bandwidth of the link. The bandwidth of the link is equal to the number of the timeslots in use among the 30 timeslots times 64 kbit/s. The value range of timeslots is 0x3E0xFFFFFFFE, that is, 00000000000000000000000000111110 to 11111111111111111111111111111110.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1-131
2 BTS Property Parameter
2
About This Chapter
Section 2.1 Basic Property Parameters of a BTS 2.3 BTS Port Property Parameters 2.4 BTS Subrack Property Parameters 2.5 Antenna Feeder Property Parameters 2.6 BTS Timeslot Parameters Used for Monitoring 2.7 Idle Timeslot Parameters
BTS Property Parameter
The following table lists the sections of this chapter. Describes Describes the basic property parameters of a BTS. Describes the BTS board property parameters. Describes the BTS port property parameters. Describes the BTS subrack property parameters. Describes the antenna feeder property parameters. Describes the BTS timeslot parameters used for monitoring. Describes the Idle timeslot parameters.
2.2 BTS Board Property Parameters
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-1
2.1 Basic Property Parameters of a BTS

2.1.1 Basic Information
Site Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02047 None None Index of a BTS BTSs are sequentially numbered in a BSC.
Site Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 32 characters None None Name of a BTS None
Site Description Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 233 characters None None This parameter indicates the alias name of the BTS. It is used to provide additional information about the BTS. This parameter cannot include the symbol #.
Father Site Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 65535 Index number of the upper-level BTS of a BTS If a BTS is directly connected to a BSC, this parameter is set to 65535. A BSC6000 supports a maximum of seven levels of cascading BTSs.
2-2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
GXPUM Subrack No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 011 None 255 Number of the subrack where the GXPUM (GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Main service) board is located Value 255 is invalid. Through the GEIUB, the BSC communicates with the BTS. Remarks: Through the GXPUMs (active/standby), the main services between the BSC and the BTS are processed. The GEIUB and the GXPUMs are in the same subrack of the BSC.
GXPUM Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 027 None 255 Number of the slot where the active XPUM board is located Value 255 is invalid. Through the GEIUB, the BSC communicates with the BTS. Remarks: Through the XPUMs (active/standby), the main services between the BSC and the BTS are processed. The GEIUB and the XPUMs are in the same subrack of the BSC.
TEI Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 0 Terminal endpoint identifier of BTS OML LAPDs This parameter is used to identify multiple LAPD links that multiplex a timeslot of an E1/optical port on the Abis interface. None
Clock Type Value Range: Unit: Internal Clock, Trace BSC Clock, External Synchronization Clock None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-3
Default Value:
Trace BSC Clock Work mode of the BTS clock In the Internal Clock mode, the BTS does not trace the external clock signal but uses the internal clock signal with great precision. The internal clock signals oscillate freely.
Description:
In the Trace BSC Clock mode, the internal clock signals with great precision trace the clock signals transmitted from the BSC. In the External Synchronization Clock mode, the internal clock signals with great precision trace the external synchronization clock signals.
Remarks:
None
Alarm Shield Flag 1(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0FF None 0 Whether an alarm corresponding to a switch is shielded 1: not shielded 0: shielded None
Alarm Shield Flag 2(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0FF None 0 Whether an alarm corresponding to a switch is shielded 1: not shielded 0: shielded None
Alarm Shield Flag 3(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0FF None 0
2-4
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
Every bit indicates whether an alarm corresponding to a switch is shielded. 1: not shielded 0: shielded None
Remarks:
Alarm Shield Flag 4(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0FF None 0 Every bit indicates whether an alarm corresponding to a switch is shielded. 1: not shielded 0: shielded Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3006C.
Description:
Alarm Shield Flag 5(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0FF None 0 Every bit indicates whether an alarm corresponding to a switch is shielded. 1: not shielded 0: shielded Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3006C.
Description:
Transmission Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Terrestrial Transmission, Satellite Transmission None Terrestrial Transmission Transmission mode on the Abis interface Description: Terrestrial Transmission: The BTS communicates with the BSC through E1/optical cables. Satellite Transmission: The BTS communicates with the BSC through communication equipment on the satellite. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-5
CRC4 Check Switch Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: N/A, OFF, ON None OFF Whether a BTS supports the CRC4 check None
Number of 2 Mbit/s in-ports in Site Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 0 This parameter indicates the number of incoming-BTS E1 ports in the cascading relationship. This parameter can be viewed only. It is automatically updated based on the addition or deletion of the incoming-BTS E1 ports.
Extended Switch of Input Alarm Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None For BTS3X series base stations (BTS30, BTS312 and BTS3012A) and double-transceiver base stations (BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3006C), the default value is Yes. Whether to enable the external extended alarm signals input at the top of the cabinet This parameter applies to only the BTS3X series base stations and double-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012, BTS3006C, and BTS3012AE).
Alarm Voltage Definition 1(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 00FF None 0 Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 1: indicates an alarm is indicated by a high level 0: indicates an alarm is indicated by a low level
Description:
2-6
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
This parameter applies to only the BTS 3X series base stations (BTS30 BTS312 and BTS3012A) and double-transceiver BTS (BTS3012, BTS3006C, and BTS3012AE).
Alarm Voltage Definition 2(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 00FF None 0 Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 1: indicates an alarm is indicated by a high level 0: indicates an alarm is indicated by a low level Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS 3X series base stations (BTS30 BTS312 and BTS3012A) and double-transceiver BTS (BTS3012, BTS3006C, and BTS3012AE).
Description:
Alarm Voltage Definition 3(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 00FF None 0 Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 1: indicates an alarm is indicated by a high level 0: indicates an alarm is indicated by a low level Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS 3X series base stations (BTS30 BTS312 and BTS3012A) and double-transceiver BTS (BTS3012, BTS3006C, and BTS3012AE).
Description:
Alarm Voltage Definition 4 (Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 00FF None 0 Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 1: indicates an alarm is indicated by a high level 0: indicates an alarm is indicated by a low level Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3006C.
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-7
Alarm Voltage Definition 5(Hex) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 00FF None 0 Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 1: indicates an alarm is indicated by a high level 0: indicates an alarm is indicated by a low level Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3006C.
Description:
2.1.2 TMU Auto Active Information

Auto-Activation Function Switch Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether to enable the auto-activation for the TMU software If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC automatically activates the configured TMU software after the version rollback. None
Main Version No. of TMU Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 09999 None None Main version number of the software of a TMU board This parameter is site-specific. This parameter applies to only the BTS3X series of base stations, BTS3001C, and BTS3002C.
Sub-Version No. of TMU Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None None
2-8
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Subsidiary version number of the software of a TMU board This parameter is site-specific. This parameter applies to only the BTS3X series base stations BTS3001C and BTS3002C..
Patch Number Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 09999 None None Number of a software patch This parameter applies to only the BTS3X series base stations BTS3001C and BTS3002C..
Month Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 012 None None Month when the software is released This parameter applies to only the BTS3X series base stations BTS3001C and BTS3002C..
Day Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None None The day when the software is released This parameter applies to only the BTS3X series base stations BTS3001C and BTS3002C..
V-Version No.of TMU Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0999 None None V version number of the TMU board software This parameter is site-specific.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-9
Remarks:
This parameter applies to only the double transceiver BTSs (BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3006C).
R-Version No.of TMU Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0999 None None Release version number of the TMU board software Configure this parameter according to the actual situation. This parameter applies to only the double transceiver BTSs (BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3006C).
C-Version No.of TMU Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 099 None None Customer version number of the TMU board software Configure this parameter according to the actual situation. This parameter applies to only the double transceiver BTSs (BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3006C).
Software Patch No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 099 None 0 Number of the software patch of a TMU board This parameter is site-specific. This parameter applies to only the double transceiver BTSs (BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3006C).
2.1.3 Extend
Upper Humidity Threshold Value Range: Unit: 099 (%) None
2-10
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
85 Upper humidity threshold configured for the environment alarm box None
Lower Humidity Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 099 (%) None 15 Lower humidity threshold configured for the environment alarm box None
Upper Temperature Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 99 to +99 (integers) C 45 Upper temperature threshold configured for the environment alarm box None
Lower Temperature Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 99 to +99 (integers) C 5 Lower temperature threshold configured for the environment alarm box None
2.1.4 Output
Cold Set Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Active, Inactive None Active Whether to enable the cooling device None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-11
Dry Set Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Active, Inactive None Active Whether to enable the drying device None
Fire Set Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Active, Inactive None Active Whether to enable the fire extinguisher None
Warm Set Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Active, Inactive None Active Whether to enable the heating device None
Wet Set Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Active, Inactive None Active Whether to enable the humidifier None
De-Steal Set Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Active, Inactive None Active
2-12
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Whether to enable the theft-proof device None
2.1.5 Active Status & Multiplex Mode

Activity State Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Activated, Not Activated None Activated Status of a BTS Only after a BTS is activated, it works normally. Description: If an inactive BTS is set to active, all the cells, TRXs, and boards under the BTS are active. If an active BTS is set to inactive, all the cells, TRXs, and boards under the BTS are inactive. Remarks: When the upper-level BTS is not activated, the lower-level BTS fails to operate even though it is activated.
Multiplexing Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1 None 4:1 Multiplexing mode of the timeslots of the designated BTS on the Abis interface 1:1: a 64 kbit/s timeslot in the statistical multiplexing mode of 1:1 2:1: a 64 kbit/s timeslot in the statistical multiplexing mode of 2:1 3:1: a 64 kbit/s timeslot in the statistical multiplexing mode of 3:1 4:1: a 64 kbit/s timeslot in the statistical multiplexing mode of 4:1 The five types of timeslot objects in BTSs are as follows: Description: OML Operation and maintenance link of a BTS A BTS can be configured with one 64 kbit/s OML that can be multiplexed with only the RSL of the same-level BTSs. RSL The radio signaling links of TRXs A TRX can be configured with only one 64 kbit/s RSL. An RSL can be multiplex with only the OML or RSL of the same-level BTSs. TCH: the 16 kbit/s traffic channel of TRXs Idle timeslot: the 16 kbit/s idle timeslots of a BTS The idle timeslots and TCH timeslots of the TRXs in the same cabinet
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-13
group can co-exist in a 64 K bandwidth. Semi timeslot: the timeslot used for monitoring a BTS The rate of a Semi timeslot can be 8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, or 64 kbit/s. The Semi timeslot cannot co-exist with other timeslots in a 64 kbit/s bandwidth. At present, the Abis interface supports only the E1 cable transmission. An E1 (bandwidth of 2.048 Mbit/s) cable can transmit signals on thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots. The OML and RSL are signaling links, which can be multiplexed on an E1 timeslot. For example, in the 4:1 multiplexing mode, three RSLs and one OML of a BTS can be multiplexed on a 64 kbit/s timeslot. Remarks: None
2.1.6 Theftproof Alarm Auto-Clear

Burglar Alarm Auto Clear Permit Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether a BTS is allowed to automatically clear burglar alarms None
Clear Command Delay Time Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 Seconds 255 The duration from the time when the burglar alarm is generated to the time when the clear command is sent None
Clear Command Time Interval Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 Seconds 255 Time interval between two sequential commands to clear a burglar alarm None
2-14
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2.1.7 OML Attribute

Abis Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Auto, Manual None Auto Configuration mode of the OML timeslots on the Abis interface Auto: automatic configuration mode Manual: manual configuration mode Description: By default, Auto is selected. The system automatically assigns OML timeslot on the Abis interface. If Manual configuration mode is selected, the manually assigned OML timeslots cannot be reassigned when the timeslot fragments are rearranged. Remarks: The manually assigned OML timeslots can only be modified manually.
OML Out-BSC Subrack No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the BSC subrack where the interface board GEIUB or GOIUB corresponding to the OML is located None
OML Out-BSC Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the slot where the interface board GEIUB or GOIUB (in a BSC subrack) corresponding to an OML is located None
OML Out-BSC E1 Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 255
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-15
Description:
Number of the port on the GEIUB or GOIUB that corresponds to an OML An E1 cable is used to connect a BSC interface board to a BTS. An OML corresponds to a BTS. None
Remarks:
OML Out-BSC Slot No.(8K) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0255 None 255 Number of the GEIUB or GOIUB port sub-timeslot occupied by an OML when the BTS works in forward ring mode The 8 kbit/s E1 sub-timeslots are numbered from 0 to 255. Remarks: For example, the first four 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot are numbered 03. The numberings of the other sub-timeslots are inducted.
OML In-Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 255 Number of the BTS port that is connected to a BSC through an E1 cable An E1 cable is used to connect a BSC interface board to a BTS. An OML corresponds to a BTS. None
Description:
Remarks:
OML In Timeslot No.(8k) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0255 None 255 Number of the BTS port sub-timeslot occupied by an OML The 8 kbit/s E1 sub-timeslots are numbered from 0 to 255. Remarks: For example, the first four 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot are numbered 03. The numberings of the other sub-timeslots are inducted.
2-16
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
OML Logic No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 02047 None None Number of the logic link LAPD corresponding to a BTS OML Description: A BTS corresponds to an OML. The OML number is consistent with the site index. LAPD links in a BSC are unique and sequentially numbered. Remarks: None
2.1.8 Auxiliary Equipment

SubRack0 Auxiliary Equipment Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Voltage Regulator, Inner Battery, Transmission Power, Auxiliary Equipment 4, Auxiliary Equipment 5, Auxiliary Equipment 6, Auxiliary Equipment 7, Auxiliary Equipment 8 None 00000000 The auxiliary equipment is installed in subrack 0. The default value 00000000 indicates that no auxiliary equipment is installed. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-17
2.1.9 Battery
Hierarchical Power Supply Para.(volt) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1924 Volt 22.5 Voltage of the bar in the power distribution box that supplies the BTS This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
SubRack0 Storage Battery Config. Permit Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether to configure subrack 0 with a storage battery cabin This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
SubRack0 Storage Battery Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Inside Storage Battery, Outside Storage Battery None Inside Storage Battery Type of the storage battery configured for subrack 0 This parameter is valid only when the parameter Subrack0 Storage Battery Config. Permit is set to Yes. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
2-18
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
SubRack0 Storage Battery Capacity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 100AH Inside Storage Battery, 300AH Outside Storage Battery, 400AH Outside Storage Battery, 500AH Outside Storage Battery, 650AH Outside Storage Battery, 200AH Outside Storage Battery None 100AH Inside Storage Battery Capacity of the storage battery configured for subrack 0 This parameter is valid only when the Subrack0 Storage Battery Config. Permit is set to Yes. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
SubRack0 Storage Battery Coefficient Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0.07C, 0.10C, 0.15C None 0.15C The maximum charge current of the storage battery can be 5%25% of the capacity of the power distribution box. By default, it is set to 15% of the capacity of the power distribution box to prolong the life cycle of a storage battery and to achieve its best effect. Suppose the capacity of the power distribution box is 200 Ah. The maximum recharge current is 30 A by default, that is, 15% % 200 A. This parameter is valid only when the parameter Subrack0 Storage Battery Config. Permit is set to Yes. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Description:
SubRack1 Storage Battery Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Inside Storage Battery, Outside Storage Battery None 0
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-19
Type of the storage battery configured for subrack 1 Description: Remarks: This parameter is valid only when the parameter Subrack1 Storage Battery Config. Permit is set to Yes. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Description:
2-20
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
SubRack2 Storage Battery Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Inside Storage Battery, Outside Storage Battery None Inside Storage Battery Type of the storage battery configured for subrack 2 This parameter is valid only when the parameter Subrack2 Storage Battery Config. Permit is set to Yes. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-21
2.1.10 Air Conditioner Protection

Check Times for Off Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 520 None 10 Number of checks when the air conditioner is off This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Qualified Times for Off Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 320 None 6 Number of qualified checks when the air conditioner is off The value of Qualified Times for Off is checked by the system. Description: The value of Qualified Times for Off must be no smaller than 60% of the value of Check Times for Off but smaller than the value of Check Times for Off. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Remarks:
Volt Threshold for Off(volt) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 220280 Volt 264 Voltage threshold for turning off the air conditioner This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Check Times for On Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 520 None 10 Number of checks when the air conditioner is on This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
2-22
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Qualified Times for On Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 320 None 6 Number of qualified checks when the air conditioner is on The value of Qualified Times for On is checked by the system. Description: The value of Qualified Times for On must be no smaller than 60% of the value of Check Times for On and smaller than the value of Check Times for On. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Remarks:
Volt Threshold for On Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 220264 Volt 264 Voltage threshold for turning on the air conditioner This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
Hysteresis for On(min) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 130 Minute 15 Hysteresis time for turning on the air conditioner This parameter applies to only the BTS3012A.
2.1.11 Reserved Parameters

Reserved Parameter110 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 65535 Reserved parameters (10 parameters) for the BTS. They can be used as new parameters in later versions. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-23
2.2 BTS Board Property Parameters

2.2.1 Basic Information
Site Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02047 None 255 Number of the BTS BTSs are sequentially numbered in a BSC.
Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the subrack where the BTS board is located Subracks are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the slot where the BTS board is located None
Cabinet No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the cabinet where the BTS board is located Cabinets are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
2-24
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Board Type Null, OMU, FHU, BIE, PWX, TRX(2.0), HPA,RTE, EAC, PWC, MCK, FPU, MUX, RTD, PWR, PWT, SPL, VTU, PWF, TMU, CDU, STU, PSU, PMU, VMB, TRX(3.0), TEU, TES, TRX(GPRS), ACK, MMU, MFU, MTR, MPW, MCD, MMU, MFU, EDU, PBU, IOMU, DRU, IASU, TCU, OSSU, P-TRX, E-TRX, R-TRX, D-TRX, PPBU, RPBU, DPBU, P-CDU, D-CDU, P-EDU, R-EDU, D-EDU, RETR, DETR, SCU, MDU, EETR, PETR, CDUC, CDUP, EDUC, EDUP, DOMU, TRU, DDPM, DATM, EMU, PIU, DPMU, DCBM, APMU, DTMU, DDPU, DATU, NFCB, DEMU, DCOM, DHEU None None Type of a BTS board, uniquely identifying a type of boards None
Value Range:
Board No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 035 None None Number of the boards of the same type Boards are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
Active State Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Activated, Not Activated None Activated Status of BTS boards The BTS board status is the same with the BTS status. If a BTS is inactive, all the boards in the BTS are inactive. If a BTS is active, all the boards in the BTS are active.
Frequency Band Attribute Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900 None None This parameter applies to only DCOM and DCBM. For the DCOM and the DCBM, DCS1800, RGSM, PCS1900, and
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-25
GSM850 are set to 2, 4, 7, and 8 respectively. The frequency band attributes of the DTRU cannot be configured. They are calculated according to the selected frequency. The DTRU supports GSM900, DSC1800, PCS1900, and GSM850. For other types of boards, this parameter is set to 0xFF. Remarks: Only the BTS3012 and BTS3012AE can be configured with the DCOM. Only the BTS3006C can be configured with the DCBM.
2.2.2 BTS3006C APMU

Board Parameter Configuration Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether the board parameters can be configured None
DPSU 0 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS and each cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or the DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU is supplied with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, an APMU manages three DPSUs. By default, three DPSUs are configured. None
Description:
Remarks:
DPSU 1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS and each cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the
2-26
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
power distribution box through the APMU or the DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU is supplied with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, an APMU manages three DPSUs. By default, three DPSUs are configured. Remarks: None
DPSU 2 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS and each cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or the DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU is supplied with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, an APMU manages three DPSUs. By default, three DPSUs are configured. None
Description:
Remarks:
Alarm Disabled Configuration NO.1 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: NO.2 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.3 Alarm Switch (Disabled) None 111 This parameter consists of three bits. Every bit indicates whether a common alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enable 1: disable Description: In the BTS3006C, an APMU supports the following three common alarms: 001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 100: NO.3 Alarm Switch (Disabled) The default value 111 indicates that the previous three alarms are disabled. Remarks: The APMU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Special Analog Alarm Disable Configuration Value Range: Battery Temperature 1 (Disabled), Preserved Parameter (Disabled), Environment Temperature 1 (Disabled)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-27
None 010 This parameter consists of three bits. Every bit indicates whether a special analog alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enable 1: disable In the BTS3006C, an APMU supports the configurations of the two switches corresponding to the following two special analog alarms: 001: Battery Temperature 1 (Disabled) 010: Preserved Parameter (Disabled) 100: Environment Temperature 1 (Disabled) The default value 010 indicates that the Battery Temperature 1 alarm and Environment Temperature 1 alarm are enabled.
Description:
Remarks:
The APMU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Special Alarm Switcher Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Preserved Parameter (Disabled), Preserved Parameter (Disabled), Gate Magnetism (Disabled) None 011 This parameter consists of three bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enable 1: disable Description: In the BTS3006C, an APMU supports the configuration of a switch corresponding to a special alarm as follows: 001: Preserved Parameter (Disabled) 010: Preserved Parameter (Disabled) 100: Gate Magnetism (Disabled) The default value 011 indicates that the Gate Magnetism alarm is enabled. Remarks: The APMU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Alarm Valid Level Configuration NO.1 Alarm Switch (High Level) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: NO.2 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.3 Alarm Switch (High Level) None 111
2-28
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter consists of three bits. Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 0: Low Level 1: High Level Description: 001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (High Level) 010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (High Level) 100: NO.3 Alarm Switch (High Level) The default value 111 indicates that all the switches correspond to high-level alarms. Remarks: The APMU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Battery Configuration Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether an outside storage battery cabin is allowed to be configured Yes: allowed No: prohibited None
Battery Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Inside Storage Battery, No Storage Battery None Inside Storage Battery type of the storage battery In the BTS3006C, the Advanced Power Module (APMU) can be configured only with Inside Storage Battery or No Storage Battery. None
Charge Coefficient Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0.05C, 0.07C, 0.10C, 0.12C, 0.15C, 0.18C, 0.2C, 0.22C, 0.25C None 0.15C Maximum charge current of the storage battery Description: The maximum charge current of the storage battery can be 5%25% of the capacity of the power distribution box. By default, it is set to 15% of the capacity of the power distribution box to prolong the life
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-29
cycle of a storage battery and to achieve its best effect. Suppose the capacity of the power distribution box is 200 Ah. The default value of MAXRechargeCurrent is 30 A, that is, 15% % 200 A. Remarks: None
Battery Capacity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 30300 Ah 200 Capacity of the power distribution box By default, it is 200 Ah. None
Hierarchical Power-off Configuration Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No Whether the configuration of Hierarchical Power-off Voltage Threshold is allowed Yes: allowed No: prohibited Remarks: None
Description:
Hierarchical Power-off Voltage Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 35.055.6 Volt 44.0 In the BTS3006C, when the storage battery voltage of any power supply unit is smaller than the value of this threshold, the hierarchical power-off function is enabled. All the BTS cabinets enable the level-two power off function and shut down the power amplifiers of all the TRXs. After all the storage batteries restore to a normal voltage, the BTS runs normally. Remarks: None
Description:
2-30
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2.2.3 BTS3006C DPMU

Board Parameter Configuration Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether board parameters can be configured None
DPSU 0 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether the DPSU is used to supply a BTS The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. The DPMU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Description:
Remarks:
DPSU 1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS. Description: The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. The DMPU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Remarks:
DPSU 2 Value Range: Unit: Yes, No None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-31
Default Value:
Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. The DMPU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Description:
Remarks:
DPSU 3 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. The DMPU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Description:
Remarks:
DPSU 4 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. The DMPU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Description:
Remarks:
2-32
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. The DMPU is configured only in BTS3006C.
Description:
Remarks:
DPSU 6 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS The BTS3006C is an outdoor micro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3006C, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. The DMPU is configured only in BTS3006C.
Description:
Remarks:
Alarm Disabled Configuration NO.7 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.6 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.5 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Value Range: NO.4 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Lightning Arrester (Disabled) NO.2 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.1 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 1111011 This parameter consists of seven bits. Every bit indicates whether a common alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enabled Description: 1: disabled In the BTS3006C, a DPMU supports the following seven common alarms: 1000000: NO.7 Alarm Switch (Disabled)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-33
0100000: NO.6 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0010000: NO.5 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0001000: NO.4 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0000100: Lightning Arrester (Disabled) 0000010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0000001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (Disabled) The default value 1111011 indicates that all the alarms except the Lightning Arrester Alarm are disabled. Remarks: The DPMU is configured only in the BTS3006C.
Special Analog Alarm Disable Configuration Battery Temperature 1 (Disabled) Environment Humidity (Disabled) Value Range: Environment Temperature 1 (Disabled) Environment Temperature 2 (Disabled) Battery Temperature 2 (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 11111 This parameter consists of five bits. Every bit indicates whether a special analog alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enabled 1: disabled In the BTS3006C, a DPMU supports the following five special analog alarms: Description: 00001: Battery Temperature 1 (Disabled) 00010: Environment Humidity (Disabled) 00100: Environment Temperature 1 (Disabled) 01000: Environment Temperature 2 (Disabled) 10000: Battery Temperature 2 (Disabled) The default value 11111 indicates that that all the special analog alarms are disabled. Remarks: None
Special Alarm Switcher Water Immersed (Disabled) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Smog (Disabled) Gate Magnetism (Disabled) None 111
2-34
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter consists of three bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enabled 1: disabled Description: In the BTS3006C, a DPMU supports the following three special alarms. 001: Water Immersed (Disabled) 010: Smog (Disabled) 100: Gate Magnetism (Disabled) The default value 111 indicates that all the special alarms are disabled. Remarks: None
Alarm Valid Level Configuration NO.1 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.2 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.3 Lightning Arrester (High Level) Value Range: NO.4 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.5 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.6 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.7 Alarm Switch (High Level) Unit: Default Value: None 1111111 This parameter consists of seven bits. Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 0: low level 1: high level 0000001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0000010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (High Level) Description: 0000100: Lightning Arrester (High Level) 0001000: NO.4 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0010000: NO.5 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0100000: NO.6 Alarm Switch (High Level) 1000000: NO.7 Alarm Switch (High Level) The default value 1111111 indicates all the valid levels of the switches corresponding to the seven alarms are indicated by high levels. Remarks: None
Battery Configuration Enabled Value Range: Yes, No
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-35
None No Whether an outside storage battery is allowed to be configured Yes: allowed No: prohibited None
Battery Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Outside Storage Battery, No Storage Battery None Outside Storage Battery Type of the battery In the BTS3006C, a DPMU can be configured with only Outside Storage Battery or No Storage Battery. None
Charge Coefficient Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0.05C,0.07C,0.10C,0.12C,0.15C,0.18C,0.2C,0.22C,0.25C None 0.15C Maximum charge current of the storage battery The maximum charge current of the storage battery can be 5%25% of the capacity of the power distribution box. By default, it is set to 15% of the capacity of the power distribution box to prolong the life cycle of a storage battery and to achieve its best effect. Suppose the capacity of the power distribution box is 200 Ah. The default value of MAXRechargeCurrent is 30 A, that is, 15% % 200 A. Remarks: None
Description:
Battery Capacity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 301000 None 200 Capacity of the power distribution box By default, it is 200 Ah.
2-36
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Hierarchical Power-off Configuration Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No Whether the configuration of Hierarchical Power-off Voltage Threshold is allowed Yes: allowed No: prohibited Remarks: None
Description:
Hierarchical Power-off Voltage Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 35.055.6 Volt 44.0 In the BTS3006C, when the voltage of any storage battery of any power supply unit is smaller than the value of this threshold, the hierarchical power-off function is enabled. All the BTS cabinets enable the level-two power off function and shut down the power amplifiers of all the TRXs. After all the storage batteries restore to a normal voltage, the BTS restores the normal running. Remarks: None
Description:
2.2.4 DOMU
E1 Port 1 set optical transmission mode Value Range: Yes, No
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-37
None No Whether the E1 port 1 is configured in optical transmission mode Yes: An optical cable can be used to connect a BTS to a BSC. No: No optical cable can be used to connect a BTS to a BSC. This parameter applies to only the BTS3006C.
E1 Port2 set optical transmission mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No Whether the E1 port 2 is configured with the optical transmission mode Yes: An optical cable can be used to connect a BTS to a BSC. No: No optical cable can be used to connect a BTS to a BSC. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3006C.
Description:
E1 Port3 set optical transmission mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No Whether the E1 port 3 is configured with the optical transmission mode Yes: An optical cable can be used to connect a BTS to a BSC. No: No optical cable can be used to connect a BTS to a BSC. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3006C.
Description:
Independent E1 Port 3 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether the E1 port 3 is configured with an independent E1 port Yes: other BTSs can connect to a BSC through this E1 port. No: other BTSs cannot connect to a BSC through this E1 port. This parameter applies to only the BTS3006C.
2-38
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2.2.5 BTS3012AE DPMU

DPSU 0 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS Because the BTS3012AE is an outdoor macro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3012AE, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. None
Description:
Remarks:
Description:
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-39
Default Value:
Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS Because the BTS3012AE is an outdoor macro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3012AE, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. None
Description:
Remarks:
Description:
Remarks:
Description:
Remarks:
2-40
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
Yes Whether a DPSU is configured to supply a BTS Because the BTS3012AE is an outdoor macro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3012AE, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. None
Description:
Remarks:
DPSU 6 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether the DPSU is used to supply a BTS Because the BTS3012AE is an outdoor macro BTS that every cabinet of it must be configured with a power distribution box. The DTMU manages the power distribution box through the APMU or DPMU. The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3012AE, a DPMU manages seven DPSUs. By default, seven DPSUs are configured. None
Description:
Remarks:
Alarm Disabled Configuration NO.7 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.6 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.5 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Value Range: NO.4 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Lightning Arrester (Disabled) NO.2 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.1 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 11111011 This parameter consists of seven bits. Every bit indicates whether a common alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enabled Description: 1: disabled In the BTS3012AE, a DPMU supports the following seven common alarms: 10000000: NO.7 Alarm Switch (Disabled)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-41
01000000: NO.6 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 00100000: NO.5 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 00010000: NO.4 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 00001000: Lightning Arrester (Disabled) 00000010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 00000001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (Disabled) The default value 11111011 indicates that only the Lightning Arrester Alarm is enabled. Remarks: None
Special Analog Alarm Disable Configuration Battery Temperature 1 (Disabled) Environment Humidity (Disabled) Value Range: Environment Temperature 1 (Disabled) Environment Temperature 2 (Disabled) Battery Temperature 2 (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 11000 This parameter consists of five bits. Every bit indicates whether a special analog alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enabled 1: disabled In the BTS3012AE, a DPMU supports the five special analog alarms: 00001: Battery Temperature 1 (Disabled) Description: 00010: Environment Humidity (Disabled) 00100: Environment Temperature 1 (Disabled) 01000: Environment Temperature 2 (Disabled) 10000: Battery Temperature 2 (Disabled) The default value 11000 indicates that the two special analog alarms Battery Temperature 2 and Environment Temperature 2 are enabled. Remarks: None
Special Alarm Switcher Water Immersed (Disabled) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Smog (Disabled) Gate Magnetism (Disabled) None 000
2-42
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter consists of three bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enable 1: disable Description: In the BTS3012AE, a DPMU supports the following three special alarms: 001: Water Immersed (Disabled) 010: Smog (Disabled) 100: Gate Magnetism (Disabled) The default values 111 indicate that all the three special alarm switches are disabled. Remarks: None
Alarm Valid Level Configuration 0000001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0000010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0000100: Lightning Arrester (High Level) Value Range: 0001000: NO.4 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0010000: NO.5 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0100000: NO.6 Alarm Switch (High Level) 1000000: NO.7 Alarm Switch (High Level) Unit: Default Value: None 1111011 This parameter consists of seven bits. Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 0: Low level 1: High Level 0000001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0000010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (High Level) Description: 0000100: Lightning Arrester (High Level) 0001000: NO.4 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0010000: NO.5 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0100000: NO.6 Alarm Switch (High Level) 1000000: NO.7 Alarm Switch (High Level) The default value indicates that only the Lightning Arrester Alarm is indicated by a low level. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-43
Battery Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Inside Storage Battery, Outside Storage Battery, No Storage Battery None Inside Storage Battery Type of the battery None.
Charge Coefficient Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0.05C, 0.07C, 0.10C, 0.12C, 0.15C, 0.18C, 0.2C, 0.22C, 0.25C None 0.15C Maximum charge current of the battery The maximum charge current of the battery can be 5%25% of the capacity of the power distribution box. By default, it is set to 15% of the capacity of the power distribution box to prolong the life cycle of a storage battery and to achieve its best effect. Suppose the capacity of the power distribution box is 200 Ah. The default value of MAXRechargeCurrent is 30 A, that is, 15% % 200 A. Remarks: None
Description:
Battery Capacity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 301000 None 50 Capacity of the power distribution box By default, it is 50 Ah.
2-44
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Hierarchical Power-off Voltage Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 35.055.6 Volt 44.0 When the voltage of the bar is smaller than the value of this threshold, the hierarchical power-off function is enabled to ensure that the power supply is reliable. None
2.2.6 DHEU
High Temperature Alarm Threshold(C) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 99.0 to +99.0 C 68.0 Threshold of the high temperature alarm Description: A high temperature alarm is reported when the Heat Exchanger Monitor Unit for DTRU BTS (DHEU) detects that the temperature inside the BTS reaches this threshold. None
Remarks:
Low Temperature Alarm Threshold(C) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 99.0 to +99.0 C 4.0 Threshold of the low temperature alarm
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-45
The low temperature alarm is reported when the DHEU detects that the temperature inside the BTS reaches this threshold. Remarks: None
2.2.7 DATU
Feed Tributary 0 DDPU Connected No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the DDPU corresponding to tributary 0 TMA None
Feed Tributary 0 DDPU Input Tributary Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Uplink Tributary 0, Uplink Tributary 1, None None None Location of the output tributary of the DDPU corresponding to the feed tributary 0 TMA None
Feed Tributary 0 TMA Configuration Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Enabled, Disabled None Disabled Whether to supply the tributary 0 TMA This parameter is controlled by the DATU.
2-46
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Feed Tributary 0 RET Antennas Configuration Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Disabled, Enabled None Disabled Whether to control the electric tuning antenna of the tributary 0 This parameter is controlled by the DATU. None
Feed Tributary 0 TMA Over Current Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02000 mA 320 Threshold for the over-current alarm When the feed current of the tributary 0 TMA crosses this threshold, an alarm is generated. None
Feed Tributary 0 TMA Low Current Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02000 mA 30 Threshold for the undercurrent alarm When the feed current of the tributary 0 TMA is smaller than the value of this threshold, an alarm is generated. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-47
Feed Tributary 1 DDPU Input Tributary Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Uplink Tributary 0, Uplink Tributary 1, None None None Location of the output tributary of the DDPU corresponding to the tributary 1 TMA None
Feed Tributary 1 TMA Configuration Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Enabled, Disabled None Disabled Whether to supply the tributary 1 TMA This parameter is controlled by the DATU. None
2-48
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Feed Tributary 8 RET Antennas Configuration Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Enabled, Disabled None Disabled Whether to control the electric tuning antenna of the tributary 2 This parameter is controlled by the DATU. None
Feed Tributary 2 TMA Over Current Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: 02000 mA
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-49
320 Threshold for the over-current alarm When the feed current of the tributary 2 TMA crosses this threshold, an alarm is generated. None
Feed Tributary 3 TMA Configuration Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Enabled, Disabled None Disabled
2-50
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Whether to supply the tributary 3 TMA This parameter is controlled by the DATU. None
Feed Tributary 4 DDPU Input Tributary Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Uplink Tributary 0, Uplink Tributary 1, None None None Location of the output tributary of the DDPU corresponding to the tributary 4 TMA
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-51
Remarks:
None
Feed Tributary 16 RET Antennas Configuration Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Enabled, Disabled None Disabled Whether to control the electric tuning antenna of the tributary 4 This parameter is controlled by the DATU. None
Feed Tributary 4 TMA Over Current Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02000 mA 320 Threshold for the over-current alarm When the feed current of the tributary 4 TMA is greater than the value of this threshold, an alarm is generated. None
Feed Tributary 4 TMA Low Current Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 02000 mA 30 Threshold for the undercurrent alarm When the feed current of the tributary 4 TMA is lower than the value of this threshold, an alarm is generated.
2-52
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Feed Tributary 5 TMA Over Current Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02000 mA 320 Threshold for over-current alarms When the feed current of the tributary 5 TMA crosses than this threshold, an alarm is generated. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-53
Feed Tributary 5 TMA Low Current Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02000 mA 30 Threshold for the undercurrent alarm When the feed current of the tributary 5 TMA is lower than the value of this threshold, an alarm is generated. None
2.2.8 DEMU
Special Analog Alarm Disable Configuration Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Humidity Sensor (Disabled), Temperature Sensor (Disabled), Preserved Parameter 2, Preserved Parameter 1, Preserved Parameter 0, 48 Voltage (Disabled) None 001110 The following three special analog alarms are available. 0: enabled 1: disabled Description: 001111: 48 Voltage (Disabled) 011110: Temperature Sensor (Disabled) 101110: Humidity Sensor (Disabled) The default value 001110 indicates that the three special analog alarms are enabled. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
2-54
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Special Alarm Switcher Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Gate Magnetism (Disabled), Infrared (Disabled), Smog (Disabled), Water Immersed (Disabled) None 0000 Whether to switch on Boolean value alarms At present, Boolean value alarms, such as water sensor alarm, frog sensor alarm, infrared sensor alarm, and door status sensor alarm, corresponds to bit 0, bit 1, bit 2, and bit 3 respectively. 0: enabled Description: 1: disabled 00000001: Water Immersed (Disabled) 00000010: Smog (Disabled) 00000100: Infrared (Disabled) 00001000: Gate Magnetism (Disabled) The default value 00001111 indicates that all the four special alarms are disabled. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Common Alarm Switcher Enabled(18) NO.8 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.7 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.6 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) Value Range: NO.5 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.4 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.3 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.2 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.1 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 00000000 This parameter consists of eight bits. Every bit indicates whether a common alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: disabled Description: 1: enabled The eight common alarms are numbered 08. You can define the indication of the eight common alarms switches as required. The default value 00000000 indicates that the eight common alarms are enabled. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-55
Common Alarm Switcher Enabled(916) NO.16 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.15 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.14 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) Value Range: NO.13 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.12 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.11 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.10 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.9 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 0 This parameter consists of eight bits. Every bit indicates whether a common alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: disabled Description: 1: enabled The eight common alarms are numbered 916. You can define the indication of the eight common alarms as required. The default value 0 indicates that the eight common alarms switches are enabled. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Common Alarm Switcher Enabled(1724) NO.24 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.23 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.22 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) Value Range: NO.21 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.20 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.19 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.18 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.17 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 00000000
2-56
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter consists of eight bits. Every bit indicates whether a common alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: disabled Description: 1: enabled The eight common alarms are numbered 1724. You can define the eight common alarms switch as required. The default value 00000000 indicates that the eight common alarms are enabled. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Common Alarm Switcher Enabled(2532) NO.32 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.31 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.30 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) Value Range: NO.29 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.28 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.27 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.26 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) NO.25 Alarm Switcher (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 00000000 This parameter consists of eight bits. Every bit indicates whether a common alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: disabled Description: 1: enabled The eight common alarms are numbered 2532. You can define the eight common alarms switches as required. The default value 00000000 indicates that the eight common alarms are enabled. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Special Alarm Switcher Valid Level Configuration Gate Magnetism (Low Level) Value Range: Infrared (Low Level) Smog (Low Level) Water Immersed (Low Level) Unit: Default Value: None 1000
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-57
This parameter consists of four bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. Description: 0: high level 1: low level The default value 1000 indicates that the gate magnetism alarm is indicated by low level, other alarms are in high level. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Common Alarm Switcher Valid Level Configuration(18) NO.8 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.7 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.6 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) Value Range: NO.5 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.4 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.3 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.2 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.1 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) Unit: Default Value: None 11111111 This parameter consists of eight bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. Description: 0: high level 1: low level The default value 11111111 indicates that the eight common alarms (numbering 18) are indicated by low level. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Common Alarm Switcher Valid Level Configuration(916) NO.16 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.15 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.14 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) Value Range: NO.13 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.12 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.11 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.10 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.9 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) Unit: Default Value: None 11111111
2-58
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter consists of eight bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. Description: 0: high level 1: low level The default value 11111111 indicates that the eight common alarms (numbering 916) are indicated by low level. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Common Alarm Switcher Valid Level Configuration(1724) NO.24 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.23 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.22 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) Value Range: NO.21 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.20 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.19 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.18 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.17 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) Unit: Default Value: None 11111111 This parameter consists of eight bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. Description: 0: high level 1: low level The default value 11111111 means that the eight common alarms (numbering 1724) are indicated by low level. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Common Alarm Switcher Valid Level Configuration(2532) Value Range: Unit: 11111111 None NO.32 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.31 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.30 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) Default Value: NO.29 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.28 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO 27 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.26 Alarm Switcher (Low Level) NO.25 Alarm Switcher (Low Level)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-59
This parameter consists of eight bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. Description: 0: high level 1: low level The default value 11111111 means that the eight common alarms (numbering 2532) are indicated by low level. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
2.2.9 BTS3012 DPMU

Board Parameter Configuration Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether board parameters are allowed to be configured None
DPSU 0 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Whether the DPSU is used to supply a BTS Description: The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3012, a DPMU manages eight DPSUs. By default, eight DPSUs are configured. None
Remarks:
Remarks:
2-60
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
Remarks:
Remarks:
DPSU 5 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None Yes Whether the DPSU is used to supply a BTS
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-61
The DPSU is the power supply unit of the power distribution box. A DPSU supplies with 1600 W. In the BTS3012, a DPMU manages eight DPSUs. By default, eight DPSUs are configured. Remarks: None
Remarks:
Remarks:
Alarm Disabled Configuration NO.7 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.6 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.5 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Value Range: NO.4 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Lightning Arrester (Disabled) NO.2 Alarm Switch (Disabled) NO.1 Alarm Switch (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: Description: None 1111011 This parameter consists of seven bits. Every bit indicates whether a common alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enable
2-62
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
1: disable In the BTS3012, a DPMU supports the configurations of seven switches corresponding to the following seven common alarms. 1000000: NO.7 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0100000: NO.6 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0010000: NO.5 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0001000: NO.4 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0000100: Lightning Arrester (Disabled) 0000010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (Disabled) 0000001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (Disabled) The default value 1111011 indicates that all the alarms except the lightning arrester alarm are disabled. Remarks: None
Special Analog Alarm Disable Configuration Battery Temperature 1 (Disabled) Environment Humidity (Disabled) Value Range: Environment Temperature 1 (Disabled) Environment Temperature 2 (Disabled) Battery Temperature 2 (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 11111 This parameter consists of five bits. Every bit indicates whether a special analog alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: enable 1: disable In the BTS3012, a DPMU supports the configurations of five switches corresponding to the following five special analog alarms. Description: 00001: Battery Temperature 1 (Disabled) 00010: Environment Humidity (Disabled) 00100: Environment Temperature 1 (Disabled) 01000: Environment Temperature 2 (Disabled) 10000: Battery Temperature 2 (Disabled) The default value 11111 indicates that all the special analog alarms are disabled. Remarks: This parameter applies to only the BTS3012.
Special Alarm Switcher Value Range: Water Immersed (Disabled) Smog (Disabled)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-63
Gate Magnetism (Disabled) Unit: Default Value: None 111 This parameter consists of three bits. Every bit indicates whether a special alarm corresponding to the switch is enabled. 0: Enable 1: Disabled Description: In the BTS3012, a DPMU supports the configurations of three switches corresponding to the following three special alarms. 001: Water Immersed (Disabled) 010: Smog (Disabled) 100: Gate Magnetism (Disabled) The default value 111 indicates that all the special alarms are disabled. Remarks: None
Alarm Valid Level Configuration NO.7 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.6 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.5 Alarm Switch (High Level) Value Range: NO.4 Alarm Switch (High Level) Lightning Arrester Alarm (High Level) NO.2 Alarm Switch (High Level) NO.1 Alarm Switch (High Level) Unit: Default Value: None 1111011 This parameter consists of seven bits. Every bit indicates whether an alarm is indicated by a high level or a low level. 0: low level 1: high level 0000001: NO.1 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0000010: NO.2 Alarm Switch (High Level) Description: 0000100: Lightning Arrester (High Level) 0001000: NO.4 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0010000: NO.5 Alarm Switch (High Level) 0100000: NO.6 Alarm Switch (High Level) 1000000: NO.7 Alarm Switch (High Level) The default value 1111011 means that all alarms except the Lightning Arrester Alarm are indicated by high level. Remarks: None
2-64
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Battery Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Inside Storage Battery, Outside Storage Battery, No Storage Battery None Inside Storage Battery Type of the storage battery None
Charge Coefficient Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0.05C, 0.07C, 0.10C, 0.12C, 0.15C, 0.18C, 0.2C, 0.22C, 0.25C None 0.15C Maximum charge current of the storage battery Description: The maximum charge current of the storage battery can be 5%25% of the capacity of the power distribution box. Suppose the capacity of the power distribution box is 200 Ah. The default value of MAXRechargeCurrent is 30 A, that is, 15% % 200 A. None
Remarks:
Battery Capacity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 301000 Ah 50 Capacity of the power distribution box By default, it is 50 Ah.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-65
Remarks:
None
2.2.10 DTMU
Cannel 0 Digital Control Signal Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Low, High None High External signal level in which an alarm is generated Description: If the external alarm signal is in a high level, set this parameter to High. If the external alarm signal is in low level, set this parameter to Low. None
Remarks:
Remarks:
Cannel 2 Digital Control Signal Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Low, High None High
2-66
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
External signal level in which an alarm is generated Description: If the external alarm signal is in a high level, set this parameter to High. If the external alarm signal is in low level, set this parameter to Low. None
Remarks:
Remarks:
2.2.11 NFCB
Smart Temperature Control Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Disabled, Enabled None Disabled Whether the intelligent temperature control mechanism of the NFCB board is enabled. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-67
2.2.12 DFCB
Tributary No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : Remarks: Uplink Tributary 0,Uplink Tributary 1,Downlink Tributary None Uplink Tributary 0 Location of the tributary of the DFCB None
TRX Transmit and Receive Relationship Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : Remarks: 0-255 None 255 Number of a TRX on uplink tributary 0 Value 255 indicates that no TRX is connected. TRXs are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
Tower Amplifier Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : Remarks: Yes,No None No Whether a tower mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed on uplink tributary 0 Yes: installed No: not installed None
Power Attenuation Factor Value Range: 015
2-68
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Unit: Default Value: Description : Description :
None 0 Power attenuation factor of uplink tributary 1 A BTS adjusts the gain of the combiner and divider unit according to Tower-Top Amplifier Flag and Power Attenuation Factor. None
Freq. Band Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : Remarks: PGSM900, EGSM(L25), EGSM(35M), RGSM(L25), RGSM(39M), DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850 None PGSM900 Types of frequency bands supported by the DFCB None
2.2.13 DFCU
Antenna Feeder Attributes
Tributary No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : Remarks: Uplink Tributary 0,Uplink Tributary 1,Downlink Tributary None Uplink Tributary 0 Location of the tributary of the DFCU None
TRX Transmit and Receive Relationship Value Range: Unit: 0255 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-69
Default Value: Description : Remarks:
255 Number of a TRX on uplink tributary 0 Value 255 indicates that no TRX is connected. TRXs are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
Tower Amplifier Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : Remarks: Yes,No None No Whether a tower mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed on uplink tributary 0 Yes: installed No: not installed None
Power Attenuation Factor Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015
None 0 Power attenuation factor of uplink tributary 1
Description:
A BTS adjusts the gain of the combiner and divider unit according to Tower-Top Amplifier Flag and Power Attenuation Factor.
Description: None
Freq. Band Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: PGSM900, EGSM(L25), EGSM(35M), RGSM(L25), RGSM(39M), DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850 None PGSM900
2-70
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description : Remarks:
Types of frequency bands supported by the DFCU None
Extended Connection Attributes

Extend Connection Configuration Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : Remarks: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the configuration of extended connection is allowed. None
Cascading DFCB No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : Remarks: 0-255 None 255 The extended connection attributes describes the cascading relationship of the DFCB that assists the DFCU to perform the six-in-one function. This parameter indicates the number of the DFCB that is cascaded to this DFCU. This parameter must be set to the number of the configured DFCB.
Cascading Tributary Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description : A, B, None None A The extended connection attributes describes the cascading relationship of the DFCB that assists the DFCU to perform the six-in-one function. This parameter indicates the number of the tributary where the DFCB (cascaded to this DFCU) locates.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-71
Remarks:
The interval between frequencies in the TRX Transmit and Receive Relationship of the DFCU should be at least 3. The interval between frequencies in the TRX Transmit and Receive Relationship of the DFCB that is cascaded to this DFCU should be at least 3. The Send Mode of these TRXs cannot be set to Wide Band Combining. The FH Mode cannot be set to RF FH.
2.2.14 Site Board Parameters

FCU Board Parameter
Fine Tune Period (Weeks) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Week 0 This parameter indicates the period in which the BTS performs fine-tuning on the DFCU. Tuning is triggered when the DFCU starts so that the frequencies of the cavity are consistent with those of the TRX. Then the DFCU can run normally. After several weeks of running, however, the frequencies of the cavity may have slight offset. Thus fine-tuning is required. Periodical fine-tuning indicates that the BTS performs periodical fine-tuning on the DFCU to prevent the frequencies of the cavity from offsetting after the DFCU runs for a long time. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012 and the BTS3012AE.
Description:
Remarks:
Cabinet Power Type Parameter

Board Parameter Configuration Enabled Value Range: Yes, No
2-72
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None No Whether board parameters can be configured None
Cabinet 0~8 Power System Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 220V DC,-48V AC,+24V AC None 220V DC This parameter indicates the type of the power system in the BTS cabinet. This parameter applies to only the BTS3012 and the BTS3012AE.
2.3 BTS Port Property Parameters

Site Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02047 None None Number of the BTS that connects to another BTS or a GEIUB through an E1 port BTSs are sequentially numbered in a BSC. An E1 cable or optical cable can be used to connect a BTS to the BSC.
E1 Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the E1 port in the BTS None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-73
Connect Object Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: BTS, GE(O)IUB None GE(O)IUB Type of the object to which the BTS connects The BSC6000 supports BTS cascading. An E1 cable connects a BTS to another BTS or to a GE(O)IUB in a BSC. If parameter is set to GE(O)IUB, an optical cable is used to connect the BTS to the BSC.
Remarks:
Connect Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0255 None 255 Number of the port of the BTS or G(E)OIUB that connects to the BTS in cascading mode Ports are sequentially numbered in a BTS. Remarks: When the Connect Object Type parameter is set to GE(O)IUB, an optical cable is used to connect the BTS to the BSC.
Connect Site Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 02047, 65535 None 65535 Index of another BTS to which the BTS port connects This parameter is valid only when BTS cascading is adopted. If a BTS is connected to a GOIUB, an optical cable is used to connect the BTS to the BSC. This parameter is set to 65535 if the BTS connects to a BSC rather than a BTS.
Remarks:
GE(O)IUB Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0255 None 255 Number of the BSC subrack where the GE(O)IUB is located
2-74
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
When the Connect Object Type parameter is set to GE(O)IUB, an optical cable is used to connect the BTS to the BSC.
GE(O)IUB Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the slot where the GE(O)IUB is located If a BTS is connected to a GE(O)IUB, an optical cable is used to connect the BTS to the BSC.
2.4 BTS Subrack Property Parameters

Site Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02047 None None Number of the BTS where a subrack is located BTSs are sequentially numbered in a BSC.
SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None None Number of a subrack Subracks are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
Cabinet No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 08 None 0 Number of the BTS cabinet where a subrack is located Cabinets are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-75
Subrack Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: MCS, BBS, CFPS, CFS, AFS, Fans, TERMINAL, Power, EMPTY, AF&CF, MC&CF None None Type of a subrack Subracks are categorized according to their functions.
2.5 Antenna Feeder Property Parameters

TRX Transmit and Receive Relationship (UL Tributary 0) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of a TRX on uplink tributary 0 Value 255 indicates that no TRX is connected. TRXs are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
Tower Amplifier Flag (UL Tributary 0) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No Whether a tower mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed on uplink tributary 0 Yes: installed No: not installed Remarks: None
Description:
Power Attenuation Factor (UL Tributary 0) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 0
2-76
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Power attenuation factor of uplink tributary 0 Description: A BTS adjusts the gain of the combiner and divider unit according to Tower-Top Amplifier Flag and Power Attenuation Factor. If the TMA gain is G dB, set the Power Attenuation Factor of the combiner and divider unit to G 4. If no TMA is installed, set this parameter to 0. None
Remarks:
TRX Transmit and Receive Relationship (UL Tributary 1) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of a TRX on uplink tributary 1 Value 255 indicates that no TRX is connected. TRXs are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
Tower Amplifier Flag (UL Tributary 1) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether a TMA is installed on uplink tributary 1 Yes: installed No: not installed None
Power Attenuation Factor (UL Tributary 1) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 0 Power attenuation factor of uplink tributary 1 Description: A BTS adjusts the gain of the combiner and divider unit according to Tower-Top Amplifier Flag and Power Attenuation Factor. If the TMA gain is G dB, set the Power Attenuation Factor of the combiner and divider unit to G 4. If no TMA is installed, set this parameter to 0. None
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-77
TRX Transmit and Receive Relationship (DL Tributary) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of a TRX on the downlink tributary Value 255 indicates that no TRX is connected. TRXs are sequentially numbered in a BTS.
A MDU No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 255 Number of the Multi Combining and Distribution Unit (MDU) board that connects to the path A of the Enhanced Duplexer Unit (EDU), Dual-Duplexer Unit for DTRU BTS (DDPU), or Dual Duplexer Module for DDRM BTS (DDPM) Value 255 indicates that no MDU is connected. Remarks: An MDU can be connected only to an EDU, DDPU, or DDPM.
Description:
B MDU No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the MDU that connects to the path B of the EDU, DDPU, or DDPM board Value 255 indicates that no MDU is connected. An MDU can be connected only to an EDU, DDPU, or DDPM.
CDU Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: CDU, PCDU, DCDU, CDUC, CDUP None CDU Type of the combiner and divider unit (CDU) None
2-78
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
EDU Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: EDU, PEDU, REDU, DEDU, EDUC, EDUP None EDU Type of the Enhanced Duplexer Unit (EDU) None
Freq. Band Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: PGSM900, EGSM(L25), EGSM(35M), RGSM(L25), RGSM(39M), DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850 None PGSM900 Types of frequency bands supported by the DDPU or DDPM None
2.6 BTS Timeslot Parameters Used for Monitoring

Timeslot Rate Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s kbit/s 64 kbit/s Rate of the timeslot that is used to monitor a BTS The monitoring timeslot cannot co-exist with other types of timeslots in a 64 kbit/s bandwidth.
In-BSC Subrack No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Number of the BSC subrack where the GEIUB or GOIUB (connects to a BTS) is located. None Number of the BSC subrack where the GEIUB or GOIUB (connects to a BTS) is located
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-79
Number of the BSC subrack where the GE(O)IUB (connects to the BTS) is located A timeslot is used to transmit the monitoring signals between the BSC and a BTS. The monitoring signals are transmitted over the transmission cables between the BSC and the BTS in the following order or conversely: From the monitoring device (connects to the BSC) to a BSC From the BSC to a BTS From the BTS to the monitoring device (connects to the BTS) Remarks: None
Description:
In-BSC Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 027 None None Number of the slot where the GE(O)IUB (connects to the BTS) is located A timeslot is used to transmit the monitoring signals between a BSC and a BTS. The monitoring signals are transmitted over the transmission cables between the BSC and the BTS in the following order or conversely: From the monitoring device (connects to the BSC) to a BSC From the BSC to a BTS From the BTS to the monitoring device (connects to the BTS) Remarks: None
Description:
In-BSC Port No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 062 None None Number of the port on the GE(O)IUB board that connects to the BTS A timeslot is used to transmit the monitoring signals between a BSC and a BTS. The monitoring signals are transmitted over the transmission cables between the BSC and the BTS in the following order or conversely: From the monitoring device (connects to the BSC) to a BSC From the BSC to a BTS From the BTS to the monitoring device (connects to the BTS) Remarks: None
Description:
2-80
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
In-BSC Timeslot No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Remarks: 031 1 Number of the timeslot that is used to monitor a BTS The timeslot corresponds to the port on the GE(O)IUB board that connects to a BTS. None
In-BSC Sub-Timeslot No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 None 0 Number of a sub-timeslot of the timeslot that is used to monitor a BTS Description: The timeslot corresponds to the port on the GE(O)IUB board that connects to a BTS. A 64 kbit/s timeslot is divided into eight 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots. Remarks: None
Site Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None Number of the free port (at the BTS) that has the minimum number Number of the E1 port (at the BTS) that connects to the monitoring equipment None
Site Timeslot No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None 1 Number of the timeslot that is used by the monitoring equipment The timeslot corresponds to the E1 port (at the BTS) that connects to a monitoring equipment The bandwidth of a timeslot is 64 kbit/s
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-81
Site Sub-Timeslot No Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 07 None 0 Number of the sub-timeslot in a BTS port timeslot occupied by the monitoring equipment which is connected to a BTS The bandwidth of a sub-timeslot is 8 kbit/s
2.7 Idle Timeslot Parameters

Site Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 32 characters None None Name of the BTS to which an idle timeslot corresponds None
Site Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the BTS port to which an idle timeslot corresponds None
Timeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 131 None None Number of the timeslot that is occupied as an idle timeslot The timeslot corresponds to a port in a BTS The bandwidth of an idle timeslot is 64 kbit/s
2-82
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Sub-Timeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0, 2, 4, 6 None None Number of the sub-timeslot in an idle timeslot that corresponds to a port in a BTS The bandwidth of an idle sub-timeslot is 16 kbit/s.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2-83
3 Cell Attribute Parameter
3
About This Chapter
Section 3.1 Basic Attribute Parameters 3.2 Idle Attribute Parameters 3.3 Call Control Parameters 3.4 Handover Parameters 3.5 Power Control Parameters 3.6 Channel Parameters 3.7 Other Property Parameters
Cell Attribute Parameter
The following table lists the sections of this chapter. Describes Describes the basic attribute parameters of a cell. Describes the idle attribute parameters of a cell. Describes the call control parameters of a cell. Describes the handover parameters of a cell. Describes the power control parameters of a cell. Describes the channel parameters of a cell. Describes the other parameters of a cell.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-1
3.1 Basic Attribute Parameters

Cell Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 08047 None None This parameter indicates the index number of a cell. Description: The cell index is uniformly numbered in a BSC. It uniquely identifies a cell and ranges from 0 to 8047. The cell index of 2G internal cells ranges from 0 to 2047. The cell index of 2G external cells ranges from 2048 to 5047. The cell index of 3G external cells ranges from 5048 to 8047. None
Remarks:
Cell Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 32 characters None None This parameter indicates the name of a cell. This parameter is a string of 1 to 32 characters. None
MCC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 000999 None None This parameter indicates the mobile country code. Description: This parameter uniquely identifies a country in which a mobile subscriber resides. For example, the mobile country code of China is 460. None
Remarks:
MNC Value Range: Unit: 00999 None
3-2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None This parameter indicates the mobile network code. This parameter identifies the home public land mobile network (PLMN) of a mobile subscriber. None
LAC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None None This parameter indicates the local area code. The LAC allocation may affect the signaling load and completion ratio. The LAC can be a decimal numeral or a hexadecimal numeral.
CI Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None None This parameter indicates the cell identification. The CI allocation may affect the signaling load and completion ratio. The CI can be a decimal numeral or a hexadecimal numeral.
BCC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 07 None None This parameter indicates the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC. In the frequency hopping cell, the TSC in the frequency hopping data table must be consistent with the BCC of the cell. The BCC is determined by the network planning department.
Remarks:
NCC Value Range: 07
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-3
None None This parameter indicates the network color code. The NCC is provided by the network operator. It identifies networks in different areas. The NCC is uniformly provided in a country. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC). After you modify the BSIC of a cell, ensure that the training sequence code (TSC) in the frequency hopping data table is consistent with the BCC of the cell. The NCC is determined by the network planning department.
Description:
Remarks:
Max TA Value Range: 063 (normal cell) 0255 (double timeslot extension cell) Symbol period Unit: One symbol period means that the actual distance between the MS and the BTS is 0.55 km. This parameter indicates the maximum timing advance. The value of this parameter is related to the cell extension type (Cell ExtType). Default Value: When the Cell ExtType is Normal Cell, the value of the Max TA ranges from 0 to 63. The default value is 62. When the Cell ExtType is Double TS Ext Cell, the value of the Max TA ranges from 0 to 255. The default value is 219. The BTS3001C does not support dual-timeslot extended cell. The value of Max TA for a dual-timeslot extended cell ranges from 0 to 127. The default value is 127. This parameter determines the actual coverage area of a cell. When the BTS receives a CHANNEL REQUEST message or a HANDOVER ACCESS message, it compares the TA with the value of this parameter to determine whether channel assignment or handover is performed in this cell. If the value of the Max TA is too small, the success rate of handover access may be affected. Remarks: None
Description:
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 8
3-4
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN For details about this parameter, see protocol 0508. Description: This parameter indicates the minimum level of received signals required for the MS to access the system. If the parameter value is small, the required level of received signals is low. If the parameter value is great, the required level of received signals is high. If the parameter value is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter value based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels.
Remarks:
8PSK Power Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 050 Attenuating by 0.2 dB for each level 0 The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2 dB. The attenuation level of the EDGE carrier is determined by this parameter. When the EDGE transceiver transmits 8PSK signals, the transmit power must be lower than the mean power in GMSK modulation mode to meet the spectrum requirement. Thus, you must set this parameter. This parameter is valid to the EDGE carrier and is invalid to the common carrier.
Description:
Remarks:
BCCH FD Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 01023 None None This parameter indicates the BCCH frequency of a cell. 1124: P-GSM 128251: GSM850 Description: 0, 9751023: E-GSM 955974: R-GSM 811885: DCS1800 512810: DCS1800 (The high frequency band supports DCS1800.) 512810: PCS1900 (The high frequency band supports PCS1900.) Remarks: This parameter is not displayed on the Set Cell Attributes tab but displayed on the Cell Attributes tab.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-5
Cell Layer Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 14 (mapping to the PICO layer, the MICRO layer, the MACRO layer, and the UMBRELLA layer) Layer 3 The framework of Huawei network is divided into four layers: Umbrella layer, Macro layer, Micro layer, and Pico layer. Each layer is designed with 16 priorities. The Umbrella layer refers to the GSM900 layer with a large coverage area. It implements the high-layer coverage and the connection of MSs moving at a high speed. Description: The Macro layer carries most traffic on the GSM900 band. The Micro layer carries most traffic on the DCS1800 band. It solves the problem of insufficient resources. The Micro layer is a main cell layer for dual-band MSs in the future. The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands. It meets the requirements for the provisioning of traffic at hot spots and dead zones. Remarks: You can set multiple priorities (a maximum of 16 priorities) for each layer. From the aspect of traffic priority, if the layer and level of a cell is low, the priority is high.
Cell Priority Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 116 Level 1 This parameter controls handover between cells at the same layer. Generally, the cells at the same layer have the same priority. If the cells at the same layer have different priorities, the cell with a smaller value has a higher priority. None
Description:
Remarks:
Cell ExtType Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Normal Cell, Double TS Ext Cell None Configure this parameter according to the practical situation.
3-6
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates whether a cell is an extension cell and the method of realizing extension cell. Description: The double timeslot extension cell corresponds to typical solution extension. The double timeslot extension cell uses the additional TDMA frame as the access delay extension. In theory, it supports the TA that is equal to 219, that is, a delay of about 120 km. If a cell is a double timeslot extension cell, the Max TA should be set to 219. Otherwise, call failures may occur though there are signals. For the double timeslot carrier of the double timeslot extension cell, only the even timeslot is functional. For the normal carrier of the double timeslot extension cell, it is the same as the carrier of the normal cell, this is, eight timeslots are functional. The RF hopping configuration of the double timeslot extension cell is similar to the RF hopping configuration of the normal cell. When the cell is a double timeslot extension cell and the hopping mode is band hopping, ensure that the carriers in one MA set are of the same type. That is, all the carriers in one MA set are double-timeslot carriers or normal carriers. Otherwise, an error may occur.
Remarks:
Cell Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Normal Cell, Concentric Cell None Normal Cell This parameter indicates whether the cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell. The concentric cell means that concentric circles with different radius are formed because the coverage of different carriers in a cell is different. Description: Because the coverage range of the internal circle and the external circle is different, the two circles can be logically considered as two cells. The internal circle has many channels, so it is a main traffic bearer layer and serves most subscribers in the coverage area of the cell. The external circle is used to solve the coverage problem. It covers the area that cannot be covered by the internal circle. The coverage range of the external circle contains the internal circle. Thus, the external circle can share certain traffic. The concentric circle technology of Huawei is used to divide the coverage area of the cell into an internal circle and an external circle. The carriers of the internal circle and the external circle can use different frequency reuse patterns. The concentric circle technology can be used with the frequency planning technology. In this way, the network quality can be improved at the same time the network capacity is expanded.
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-7
UL DTX Value Range: Unit: Default Value: May use, Shall use, Shall not use None Shall use This parameter indicates whether the MS is allowed to use the uplink DTX. For details about DTX, see the protocol 0508. The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows the MS to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: Description: On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS For the entire network, if the frequency interference is reduced, the network capacity may increase. The following functions must be enabled before you enable the DTX function: Voice activation detection (VAD) function Remarks: Silence descriptor (SID) function Comfort noise function You can also determine whether the downlink DTX function is enabled in the BSC through parameter setting. For details about parameter setting, see Whether to Use Downlink DTX in the Cell Attribute table.
PCU Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: No PCU, A string of 251 characters None No PCU Name of the PCU None
Activity State Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Activated, Not Activated None Activated This parameter indicates whether the cell is in Activated state. None
3-8
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Encryption Algorithm Value Range: Unit: Default Value: A5/0 (mandatory), A5/1 A5/7 None 10000000 (A5/0) This parameter (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicates whether the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2A5/7 encryption algorithm is supported respectively. Description: 1: It indicates that the BSS supports the encryption algorithm. 0: It indicates that the BSS does not support the encryption algorithm. This parameter determines the encryption algorithm to be supported. This parameter cannot be set to all 0s. The most significant bit must be 1, that is, the A5/0 algorithm must be supported. The encryption settings at the BSS side and at the NSS side must be consistent. Whether to enable encryption in the system and which encryption algorithm is to be used must be described in the MAP function flow of the MSC. The specific encryption algorithm must be set based on the data configuration of the BSC and the capability of the MS.
Remarks:
Call re-establishment Forbidden Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the network allows call re-establishment. Description: If a call drop is caused by the radio link fault in the dead zone due to burst interference and high building, the MS can start the call re-establishment procedure to resume the call. The permission of call re-establishment may decrease the mean call drop rate, but it may take a long time. This function is applicable to the suburbs or urban areas with poor coverage. None
Remarks:
TCH Immediate Assignment Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No Yes: It indicates that the TCH is immediately assigned when the SDCCH has no available resource during the processing of access request. No: It indicates that only the SDCCH can be assigned.
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-9
Remarks:
None
Direct Retry Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates the switch of TCH direct retry. If this parameter is set to Yes, the handover procedure is used and the MS is handed over to the neighboring cell. Description: Direct retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If direct retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the sector carrier configuration of the BTS and the network layout. None
Remarks:
UL PC Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the adjustment of MS power is allowed. At the band 900 MHz, the power control level of the MS is from 0 to 19 (totally 20 levels). Generally, the maximum power control level supported by the MS is 5 (mapping to 33 dBm), and the minimum power control level supported by the MS is 19 (mapping to 5 dBm). Remarks: At the bands 1800 MHz and 1900 MHz, the power control level of the MS is from 0 to 31 (totally 32 levels). Generally, the maximum power control level supported by the MS is 0 (mapping to 30 dBm), and the minimum power control level supported by the MS is 15 (mapping to 2 dBm). Other power control levels are reserved for high-power MSs.
DL PC Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the adjustment of BTS power is allowed.
3-10
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
The downlink power control (at the BTS side) supports a maximum of 15 levels. Each level supports dynamic power control of 2 dB.
SD Dynamic Allocation Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates the switch of TCH and SDCCH dynamic adjustment. This parameter indicates whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. Description: When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resource. In this case, the TCH (including TCH and dynamic PDCH that acts as TCH) must be converted into SDCCH to ensure the access of most subscribers. The SDCCH dynamic adjustment increases system capacity and reduces the dependence on the calculation accuracy of signaling channel requirement. Remarks: The SDCCH dynamic adjustment may increase the traffic of handover in the cell.
GPRS Support Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the general packet radio service (GPRS) is allowed in the cell. Description: The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be added at the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) must be added in the core network. For the BTS versions that do not support GPRS and the cells in which GPRS is not activated, the value of GPRS Support must be set to No. Otherwise, some MSs may fail to access the network.
Remarks:
EDGE Support Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-11
Description:
The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improves the data rate of each data channel. The EGPRS improves the capability of single timeslot data transmission through the 8PSK modulation mode on the Um interface and improves the data transmission capability of a single subscriber through multiple timeslots binding. For the BTS versions that do not support EDGE and the cells in which EDGE is not activated, the value of EDGE Support must be set to No. Otherwise, some MSs may fail to access the network.
Remarks:
DL DTX Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether downlink DTX is used in a cell. The use of downlink DTX is also controlled by the DTX switch in the MSC. If downlink DTX is forbidden in the MSC, downlink DTX is not used regardless of the setting of this parameter. If downlink DTX is allowed in the MSC, the setting of this parameter can determine whether downlink DTX is used in the cell.
Remarks:
Support NACC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the cell supports the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) function. The NACC function means that the network notifies the MS (in the packet transmission state) of the system information about the neighboring cells in advance in NC0, NC1, or NC2 network control mode. Thus the cell reselection of the MS is quickened. The BSC plays a minor role in the NACC function. It sends the system information about the cell and the information about the neighboring cells to the PCU instead of participating in the NACC processing. Remarks: This parameter requires the support of licenses.
Description:
Support PACKET SI STATUS Value Range: Unit: Yes, No None
3-12
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
No This parameter indicates whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure.
Description:
The PACKET SI STATUS procedure means that the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status message to the network side if the cell is configured with PBCCH. The message indicates the system information stored in the MS. The network side sends the Packet Serving Cell Data message, indicating the system information that are not stored in the MS, to the MS. None
Remarks:
Support NC2 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function. Description: NC2 refer to network control mode 2. It indicates that the MS sends the measurement reports of the current cell and of the neighboring cells to the PCU. The network side controls the MS to perform cell reselection. This parameter requires the support of licenses.
Remarks:
PCU Support 64 Adjacent Cells Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the PCU where the cell stays supports 64 neighboring cells. Description: If the parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can report the information about all the neighboring cells to the PCU when the number of neighboring cells for the current cell exceeds 32. If the parameter is set to No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32 neighboring cells to the PCU. Remarks: This parameter is configured only when the PCU supports 64 neighboring cells.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-13
3.2 Idle Attribute Parameters

3.2.1 Basic Idle Parameters
ATT Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether IMSI attach-detach is allowed. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same. Description: If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources. None
Remarks:
Tx-integer (RACH Timeslot (equals a TDMA frame, 4.615ms)) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 312, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50 None 32
3-14
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the number of timeslots in an interval when an MS sends continuously multiple channel requests. Aiming at reducing conflicts on the RACH channel, this parameter and the CCCH configuration mode co-determines the parameter S. When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 55 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a channel. When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 41 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a channel. When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 76 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a channel. When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 52 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a channel. When this parameter is set 5, 10, or 20, S is 109 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a channel. When this parameter is set 5, 10, or 20, S is 58 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a channel. When this parameter is set 6, 11, or 25, S is 163 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a channel. Description: When this parameter is set 6, 11, or 25, S is 86 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a channel. When this parameter is set 7, 12, or 32, S is 217 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a channel. When this parameter is set 7, 12, or 32, S is 115 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a channel. The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of {0, 1, MAX (T, 8)1}. The number of timeslots between two adjacent channels is a random value from the collection of {S, S+1, , S+T1}. When T increases, the interval between two adjacent channel requests increases, and RACH conflicts decrease. When S increases, the interval between two adjacent channel requests increases, and RACH conflicts decrease, thus improving the usage of AGCH and SDCCH. The access time of the MS, however, is prolonged and the network performance is threatened when T and S increase. Thus, an appropriate T value should be adopted to ensure that S is as low as possible, and that AGCH and SDCCH are not overloaded. When the network traffic is heavy, the success rate of immediate assignment is low if the sum of S and T is low. Thus, the value of T should be properly adjusted to make the sum of S and T greater.
Remarks:
Cell_Bar_ Access Value Range: 1, 0
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-15
None 0 1: Yes 0: No
Description:
This parameter indicates whether cell access is barred. For details, refer to protocol 0408. Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells.
Remarks:
None
Cell_Bar_Qualify Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1, 0 None 0 1: Yes 0: No Description: Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) functions only for cell selection. Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, refer to protocol 0408. CBA and CBQ affect the network access of an MS.
Remarks:
BS_AG_BLKS_RES Value Range: Unit: 02 (a combined CCCH), 07 (others) Block 1 (combined CCCH) 2 (non-combined CCCH) Default Value: When the cell is configured with CBCHs, the BS_AG_BLKS_RES parameter must be equal to or greater than 1, that is, the parameter cannot be 0. This parameter indicates the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel. After the CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. As specified in the protocol, this parameter must be greater than 0 in the following cases: Remarks: System information is transmitted on the extended BCH. The system is configured with CBCHs. The GSMR system is configured with NCHs.
Description:
3-16
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
CCCH Conf Value Range: Unit: 1 combined CCCH, 1 non-combined CCCH, 2 non-combined CCCH, 3 non-combined CCCH, 4 non-combined CCCH None For the cell with one TRX, Huawei recommends that you configure a combined CCCH (in the system that has a small number of LA paging messages). For other types of cells, the configuration of CCCHs depends on the number of TRXs in the cell. For a system that has both main and extended BCCHs, the number of non-combined CCCHs equals the number of BCCHs. The BS_AG_BLKS_RES and CCCH Conf. parameters can be changed according to the type of channel 0 on the TRX that carries main BCCH in the cell. Default Value: If this parameter is set to a value rather than 1 combined CCCH, the default value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES can be set to 2. The parameter ranges from 1 to 7. If this parameter is set to 1 combined CCCH, the default value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES can be set to 1. The parameter ranges from 1 to 2. If channel 0 on the TRX that carries main BCCH is set to Combined BCCH or BCCH+CBCH, this parameter can be set to 1 combined CCCH. If channel 0 on the TRX that carries main BCCH is set to Main BCCH, this parameter can be set to N non-combined CCCH, where N means the sum of channels 0, 2, 4, and 6 that are configured as main BCCHs and BCHs. This parameter indicates the CCCH configuration in a system. Description: In a corresponding BCCH multi-frame, the number of CCCH message blocks may be 3, 9, 18, 27, or 36. CCCH configuration determines the capacity of PCH, AGCH, and RACH. Particularly, the PCH capacity of all cells in an LAC should be consistent, or that the cell with the least PCH capacity has enough capacity to bear all the TRXs in the LAC. None
Remarks:
BS-PA-MFRARMS Value Range: Unit: 29 Multi-frame period For an area with ordinary or heavy load on the paging channel, or an area with medium or high traffic, this parameter can be set to 6 or 7, that is, 6 or 7 multi-frames in a paging group are reserved. For an area with low load on the paging channel, or an area with light traffic, this parameter can be set to 4 or 5, that is, 4 or 5 multi-frames in a paging group are reserved. This parameter is generally set to 2.
Default Value:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-17
This parameter indicates the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, refer to protocols 0502 and 0508. When MFR increases, the number of paging sub-channels increases, thus reducing the number of subscribers served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average work time of the MS battery. For details about the paging group calculation, refer to protocol 0502. Description: When MFR increases, the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance drops. This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The MFR value should be adjusted based on the load. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC. A paging block (four continuous CCCH timeslots) can bear two IMSI paging messages, four TMSI paging messages, or two AGCH immediate assignment messages. The downlink signaling channel is faulty in idle mode, and the DSC is used to judge whether the downlink signaling channel is faulty. When an MS stays in a cell, the DSC is initiated to the integer closest to 90/N, where N equals BS_PA_MFRMS ranging from 2 to 9. Thus, the DSC increases by 1 (without exceeding the initial value) when the MS successfully decodes a message on its paging sub-channel, and the DSC decreases by 4 when the decoding fails. When the DSC is equal to or less than 0, the downlink signaling channel is faulty. Then, a cell reselection is required. The value of this parameter is site-specific. For example, when a BTS2X is adopted, the CCCH is over-loaded if this parameter is too small. Thus, 5 or 6 is recommended for this parameter. However, the BTS3X series and dual-transceiver BTSs do not have such a problem.
Remarks:
T3212 (6 minutes) Value Range: Unit: 0255 6 minutes
3-18
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
2030 (urban areas) 1020 (suburbs) 810 (mountains) It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic. Default Value: To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. The value of T3212 can be increased when an entity involved is overloaded. Time limits of regular location update in the VLR/BSC can be adjusted flexibly to improve the system connection rate, reduce invalid paging requests, and to enhance the LAC capacity. This parameter indicates the timeout value, or the timer, for regular location update. In the VLR, another regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network increases, the usage of radio resources drops. Description: In addition, when the location update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly shortened. When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, the load on the A-interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots. The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC. In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. Remarks: When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell. When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. In this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though the called MS is on. In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells.
CRH Value Range: Unit: 014, with a step length of 2 dB dB
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-19
Default Value:
810 (dual-frequency networks in urban areas, not sharing the LAC) 6 (common situations) CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (CRH) is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed.
Description:
This parameter is used to prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. If this parameter is excessively low, ping-pong handovers occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. If this parameter is excessively high, the cell that the MS camps on for long may not be the best after the LAC changes.
Remarks:
None
PI Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used. In actual situations, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, refer to protocols 0408 and 0508. In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.
Description:
3-20
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS obtains C1 and C2 of non-serving cells (neighboring cells). In addition, the MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s. If yes, the path loss is too large. Whether a better cell exists. A better cell exists if the following conditions are met: Remarks:
C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s. The C2 of a new cell in another LAC minus CRH (broadcast in the system information of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s.
If the conditions above are met, the MS reselects a cell and does not go to the previous cell within 5s.
NCC Permitted Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Selection of 7 Perm., Selection of 6 Perm., Selection of 5 Perm., Selection of 4 Perm., Selection of 3 Perm., Selection of 2 Perm., Selection of 1 Perm., Selection of 0 Perm. None 11111111 This parameter, sent in system information 2 and 6, lists the NCC codes of the cells to be measured by the MS. Description: When this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. This parameter consists of a byte (8 bits). Each bit corresponds to an NCC (07) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-21
The MS cannot report the information on neighboring cells where the NCC is 0. Thus, this parameter should be correctly specified. Otherwise, an MS during conversation cannot perform normal handover and a call dropout occurs. For details, refer to protocol 0508. During conversation, the MS reports to the BTS the signaling information on neighboring cells. A report covers a maximum of six cells. Thus, the MS should report those possibly targeted cells, rather than selecting cells based only on the signal level. Generally, the MS does not report cells belonging to other GSM PLMNs. This function enables the MS to measure only those specified cells. This parameter specifies the codes of the NCCs to be measured by the MS. Over the SCH, the system constantly transmits the BSIC, the first three bits of which indicate the NCC. Thus, the MS needs to compare only this parameter with the adjacent NCCs measured. Then, the MS reports the matched NCCs to the BTS and discards others. This parameter affects only those MSs during conversation, as well as boundary handovers.
Remarks:
CRO (2dB) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (0 dB to 126 dB, with a step length of 2 dB) None 0 Cell Reselect Offset (CRO) indicates the C2 modified manually. If this parameter is reasonably configured, the number of handovers can be reduced and a better cell can be assigned to. Description: When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for an MS to access a cell when CRO increases. Generally, the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring uncertainties to the network. In addition, the same CRO applies to the cells with the same priority. For details, refer to GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. Remarks: In cells with the same priority, the offset should be the same. Otherwise, unexpected faults may occur.
3.2.2 Advanced Idle Parameters

Idle Parameters
ACS Value Range: Unit: Yes, No None
3-22
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
No Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS of the source from which cell reselection-related parameters are obtained.
Description:
When ACS is set to 0, it is invalid in system information 3, but it means in system information 4 that the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of system information 4. When ACS is set to 1, it means that the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of system information 7 and 8.
Remarks:
None
TO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 06 (0 dB to 60 dB) 7 (infinite) Seconds 0 Cell Reselect Temporary Offset (TO) indicates the temporary correction of C2. Description: This parameter functions only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, refer to protocols 0508 and 0408. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. Remarks: None
PT (s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 030 (20s to 620s) 31 (reserved for changing the effect of CRO on C2) Seconds 0 Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT) helps to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, refer to protocols 0508 and 0408. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. After cell selection is complete, the MS stays in the selected cell if nothing important changes. Then, the MS measures the signal level of BCCH TRX in neighboring cells and records the top six cells with high signal levels. Thus, the MS can obtain the system information and control information on neighboring cells. However, the MS selects another cell, a process called cell reselection, when required conditions are met. Signal strength is an important
Description:
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-23
requirement. That is, cell reselection is required when the signal strength in a neighboring cell is better than that in the serving cell. C2, indicating signal strength, is calculated as follows: When PT is not 11111, C2 = C1 + CRO TO X H (PT T) Where, If X < 0, H (x) = 0. If X 0, H (x) = 1. T, a timer beginning from zero, counts when a cell is listed in the six cell tables because the signal level in the cell is among the top six. When the cell is out of the six cell tables, T is reset. The precision of T is calculated by one TDMA frame (about 4.62 ms). After a cell reselection is complete, the original serving cell becomes a neighboring cell, and T in the original serving cell becomes the initial value of PT. Thus, when PT minus T is less than 0, that is, C2 = C1 + CRO, no time penalty is given to the original serving cell. If PT is 11111, C2 = C1 CRO CRO is used to manually modify C2, that is, C2 is rectified before T increases to PT. PT indicates the time period during which TO affects C2, but the value of 11111 is reserved for changing the effect of CRO on. CRO, TO, and PT are parameters related to cell reselection. When PI is 1, these parameters are broadcast over the BCCH. When PI is 0, these parameters are 0, so C2 equals C1. In an LAC, the MS implements cell reselection if the C2 of a neighboring cell is greater than that of the serving cell in more than 5s. In different LACs, the MS implements cell reselection if the C2 of another cell minus that of the serving cell is greater than the CRH. Note that a minimum interval of 15s is required for cell reselection because frequent cell reselection affects the system. Signal strength-based cell reselection is implemented based on C2. C2, a parameter based on C1, takes into consideration manual adjustments to preferably select some cells or reject some cells, thus achieving better traffic balance. In addition to C1, other parameters that affect C2 are CRO, TO, and PT. CRO indicates manual correction made to C2, and TO indicates temporary correction in a period that depends on PT. Generally, the parameters mentioned above can be adjusted in the following methods: In a cell with heavy traffic or poor signal strength, PT can be set to 31 to invalidate TO. Thus, C2 equals C1 minus CRO and is manually decreased. Hence, it is less possible for the MS to reselect this cell. In this case, CRO can be appropriately specified because CRO increases when it is becomes more difficult for the MS to access a cell, and the vice versa. In a cell with light traffic or low resource usage, the CRO can be specified ranging from 0 dB to 20 dB because a tendency is encouraged towards such a cell. The greater the tendency is, the
3-24
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
greater the CRO is, and vice versa. In addition, it is advised that TO should be the same as or a little greater than CRO, and that PT preferably ranges from 20s to 40s. In a cell with medium traffic, it is advised that CRO should be set to 0. Thus, C2 equals C1 and no manual interference is imposed on the cells. When adjusting the parameters mentioned above, note the following points: CRO must not exceed 25 dB because excessively great CRO threatens network stability. CRO, PT, and TO are cell-based, but C2 is closely related to neighboring cells. Thus, take neighboring cells into consideration when specifying the parameters.
2G BA1 Table
2G BA1 Table Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 01023 None None This parameter indicates a table recording the BCCH frequencies of neighboring cells. Description: The table is for frequency search when an MS is idle, and sent through system information 2, 2bis, and 2ter. When an MS is idle, it monitors the BCCH TRXs listed in the BA table and initiates reselection when possible. Thus, it is recommended that BCCH frequencies of neighboring cells should be listed. Remarks: None
3G BA1 Table
3G BA1 table is sent through the system information 2QUATER, this table lists the neighbor 3G cells that the idle MS searches, including parameters as follows: DL UARFCN Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 016383 None None Downlink frequencies in 3G cells None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-25
Scrambling Code Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0511 None None Scrambling codes in 3G cells None
Diversity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes,No None None Scrambling codes in neighboring 3G cells None
3G BA1 Table Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Refer to the description. None None Sent through the system information 2QUATER, this table lists the neighbor 3G cells that the idle MS searches. DL UARFCN Value Range: 016383 Description: Downlink frequencies in 3G cells Scrambling Code Description: Value Range: 0511 Description: Scrambling codes in 3G cells Diversity Value Range: 01 Description: Scrambling codes in neighboring 3G cells Thus, it is recommended that the table be configured based on the actual situations. Remarks: It is in decimal mode.
3-26
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3.3 Call Control Parameters

3.3.1 Basic Call Control Parameters
SACCH Multi-Frames (SACCH period (480 ms)) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 SACCH period (480 milliseconds) 31 This parameter is used for the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure. When the BTS receives the measurement report from the SACCH, the counter for determining the radio link fault is set as this parameter. Each time the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS fails in decoding, the counter decreases by 1. If the SACCH measurement report is correctly decoded, the counter increases by 2. When the value of the counter is 0, the radio link fails, and the BTS sends a connection failure indicator to the BSC. The radio link failure time of the uplink and the downlink is defined for the number of SACCH multi-frames and the radio link failure counter in the system message. The judgment standard is whether the SACCH message is correctly decoded. Remarks: When the parameter value does not match the value supported by the BTS, an alarm is generated.
Description:
RACH Busy Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 5 (BTS2X, BTS24); 16 (BTS3X, double-transceiver BTSs)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-27
For BTS3X series and dual-transceiver BTSs, this parameter indicates the level threshold of MS random access for the system to determine the RACH busy state. When the received level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. In the BTS3X, this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The threshold setting does not affect the normal access of the MS. In the BTS2X version (BTS24 not included), this parameter indicates the level threshold for the system to determine MS random access. When the received level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold and the access demodulation is successful, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy and determines whether the RACH access is valid based on the parameter Random Access Error Threshold. In the BTS2X version, the parameter RACH Busy Threshold determines whether the timeslot is busy and affects the normal access of the MS. The MS access is allowed only when the level of the MS random access burst is greater than the RACH Busy Threshold. In the BTS24 version, this parameter indicates the level threshold of the MS random access for the system to determine the RACH busy state. When the received level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than the threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. This parameter also indicates whether the MS access is allowed. The MS access is allowed only when access level (including random access and handover access) is greater than the threshold.
Description:
3-28
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
In the BTS2X version (BTS24 not included), this parameter indicates the level threshold for the system to determine MS random access. When the received level of a random access burst timeslot of the RACH is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. This parameter must be set based on the actual sensitivity of the BTS and the lowest access level of the MS to ensure the uplink and downlink balance. This parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST during asynchronous handover. For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter does not affect MS access but affects the report of CCCH_LOAD_IND. If the level received by the BCCH at the network side is greater than the RACH Busy Threshold, the CCCH_LOAD_IND is counted once whether the decoding is successful. The RACH whose level is lower than the RACH Busy Threshold and whose decoding is successful is also counted. The measurement period is the RACH mean load timeslot. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS easily considers that the RACH timeslot is busy and reports overload messages to the BSC. If the value is too high, the BTS cannot determine the state of the RACH timeslot correctly. In the BTS24 version, if this parameter is used to judge busy timeslot, its setting is consistent that in the BTS30. If this parameter is the level threshold for valid random access, its setting is consistent with that in the BTS20. The setting of this parameter for the BTS312, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, BTS3002C and the double-transceiver BTSs is the same as that in the BTS30.
Remarks:
Paging Times BTS2X version (BTS24 not included): 14 The BTS24 version or later, BTS3X or later, BTS3001C version or later, BTS3002C version or later, and dual-transceiver BTSs support paging re-sending. Paging times: 18 BTS3X version: 15 The BTS versions that are earlier than the previous versions do not support BTS paging re-sending. Unit: Default Value: Times 4
Value Range:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-29
Description:
For the BTS2X series, this parameter is used to determine paging re-sending. This parameter and the paging times configured in the MSC determine the paging re-sending times. The total paging times is equal to this parameter value multiplied by the paging times configured in the MSC. At present, the paging re-sending times is set to 4 in the MSC. The BSC does not support the re-sending mechanism. The BSC processes a paging message after receiving a paging message. The BTS2X supports the re-sending mechanism. Both the BTS3X series and the dual-transceiver BTSs support paging re-sending. None
Remarks:
Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Enable, Disable None Disable When the Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is allowed, the direct try flow is allowed if the following two conditions are met: Description: The cell supports the direct try function. The load of the cell is larger than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. Remarks: None
Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 06 None 5 When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells. Description: This parameter is used to adjust the candidate target cells during direct retry. If the parameter is set to an overgreat value, the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover has little meaning. If the parameter is set to an oversmall value, it is difficult to select candidate target cells. Remarks: None
3-30
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
MS MAX Retrans Value Range: Unit: 1, 2, 4, 7 None In the areas where the radius of the cell is greater than 3 km and the traffic volume is low, such as suburbs or rural areas, M can be set to 11 (that is, the MS MAX Retrans is set to 7) to improve the success rate of MS access. In the areas where the radius of the cell is smaller than 3 km and the traffic volume is normal, such as urban non-busy areas, M can be set to 10 (that is, the MS MAX Retrans is set to 4). For micro cells, M should be set to 01, that is, the MS MAX Retrans is set to 2. For micro cells where the traffic volume is heavy and cells where congestion occurs, M should be set to 00, that is, the MS MAX Retrans is set to 1. For BTSs using satellite transmission, M should be set to 4 or greater. This parameter indicates the maximum times for sending Channel Request messages by the MS during an immediate assignment. Description: After the MS initiates immediate assignment, it always intercepts all the common control channel messages of the BCCH and CCCH. If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval. When the downlink quality is poor, the MS may send SABM to the BTS for many times.
Default Value:
Remarks:
Common Access Control Class Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Level0 Forbidden, Level1 Forbidden, Level2 Forbidden, Level3 Forbidden, Level4 Forbidden, Level5 Forbidden, Level6 Forbidden, Level7 Forbidden, Level8 Forbidden, Level9 Forbidden None 0000000000
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-31
This parameter is used for load control. It determines whether the users of common access class are allowed to access the network. 1: Not allowed 0: Allowed For example, 0000000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 0 are allowed to access the network. Description: During the BTS installation, activation, or cell maintenance test, this parameter can be set to 1. All users are not allowed to access the network, thus reducing the impact on installation or maintenance. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur in busy hours. For example, more RACH burst occurs, the AGCH flow is overloaded, or the Abis interface flow is overloaded. If this parameter is set to 1 for users of some classes, the traffic volume in this cell may be reduced. Remarks: None
Special Access Control Class Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Level11 Forbidden, Level12 Forbidden, Level13 Forbidden, Level14 Forbidden, Level15 Forbidden Class 00000 This parameter is used for load control. It determines whether the users of special access class are allowed to access the network. 1: Not allowed 0: Allowed Description: For example, 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 11 are allowed to access the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur in busy hours. For example, more RACH burst occurs, the AGCH flow is overloaded, or the Abis interface flow is overloaded. If this parameter is set to 1 for users of some classes, the traffic volume in this cell may be reduced. Remarks: None
Emergent Call Disable Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No
3-32
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
For MSs whose access class is from 0 to 9, if the Emergent Call Disable is set to No, emergency calls are allowed. Description: For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when the access control bit is set to 0 and the Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes. None
Remarks:
Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 464 (with the step of 4) SACCH period (480 milliseconds) 52 For details about the Radio Link Timeout (RLINKT), see the protocol 0408, 0508. This parameter determines the time for disconnecting a call when the MS fails to decode the SACCH. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2. When the counter S is equal to 0, it is an indication that the downlink radio link fails. Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released. In the areas where the traffic volume is low, such as rural areas, this parameter should range from 52 to 64. In the areas where the traffic volume is low and the coverage radius is large, such as suburbs or rural areas, this parameter should range from 36 to 48. In the areas where the traffic volume is comparatively heavy, such as urban areas, this parameter should range from 20 to 32. In the areas where the traffic volume is very heavy (generally covered by micro cells), this parameter should range from 4 to 16. In the cells where some areas are not covered or call drops occur frequently, this parameter should be set to a larger value so that conversations can resume. If the value of this parameter is too small, the radio link may easily fail, thus causing call drops. If the value of this parameter is too large, the connection is not release for a long time, thus reducing the utilization of resources. This parameter takes effect to the downlink.
Description:
Remarks:
ECSC Value Range: Unit: Yes, No None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-33
Default Value:
No Yes (hybrid cells) The early classmark sending control (ECSC) indicates whether the MSs in a cell use early classmark sending. For details, see the protocol 0408. After receiving a message of classmark change, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as possible, The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains power information of each band of multi-band MSs. In the inter-band handover, power class must be correctly described. When paging is made or the BA2 table is sent between different bands, the CM3 message must be known. For 900/1800 MHz mixed cells sharing BCCH, the ECSC is set to Yes. For 1800 MHz cells in the dual-band network, the ECSC is set to Yes. When the A5/47 encryption algorithm is used, the ECSC is set to Yes. The ECSC is oriented to dual-band MSs. It is invalid to the single-band MSs.
Description:
Remarks:
For dual-band MSs, if the ECSC is disabled, the MSC sends a CLASSMARK REQUEST message after the MS reports an EST IND message. The MS then reports the CLASSMARK UPDATE message. Other functions are not affected.
MBR (Multi Band Report) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 03 None 0 2 (1800 MHz cells)
3-34
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter is used for the MS to report neighboring cell explanation of multiple bands. It is sent in the system messages 2ter and 5ter. 0: The MS reports the measurement results of six neighboring cells known and permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best signal regardless of the band at which the neighboring cell is located. 1: The MS reports the measurement result of a neighboring cell known and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the neighboring cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighboring cells regardless of the bands at which the neighboring cells are located. 2: The MS reports the measurement results of two neighboring cells known and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the neighboring cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighboring cells regardless of the bands at which the neighboring cells are located. 3: The MS reports the measurement results of three neighboring cells known and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the neighboring cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighboring cells regardless of the bands at which the neighboring cells are located. When the traffic volumes of multiple bands are the same and there is no special requirement on the band, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 0. When the traffic volumes of multiple bands are different and the MS is expected to enter a band preferentially, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 3. In other cases except the first two cases, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 1 or 2. For details, see protocol 0508. Remarks: None
Description:
Allow Reassign Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the reassignment function is allowed. If the reassignment is allowed, the BSC initiates the second assignment when it receives the Um interface assignment failure message. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-35
Allow EMLPP Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the enhanced multi level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function is allowed. The eMLPP means that the network is allowed to use different policies such as queuing, preemption, and direct retry according to the calls with different priorities when the network resources are seized. Description: If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with lowest precedence performs handover, and the MS with higher precedence seizes the idle channel after handover. If the Allow EMLPP is set to No, when an MS with lower precedence initiates release, the MS with higher precedence seizes the idle channel after release. The eMLPP provides a maximum of seven priorities (A, B, and 04). The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the network. Priorities 04 are used for subscribers all over the world. If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the support of the MSC, HLR, MS (including SIM) is required.
Remarks:
3.3.2 Advanced Call Control Parameters

Access Control
Speech Version Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Support Full-rate Version 1, Support Full-rate Version 2, Support Full-rate Version 3, Support Half-rate Version 1, Support Half-rate Version 2, Support Half-rate Version 3 None 001011 This parameter indicates which speech version is supported. If the parameter is set to 001011, infer that full-rate version 1, full-rate version 2, and half-rate version 1 are supported. The differences between the speech versions are as follows: Remarks: Full-rate speech version 1 uses FR (the rate is 13 kbit/s). Full-rate speech version 2 uses EFR (the rate is 12.2 kbit/s). Full-rate speech version 3 is provided.
3-36
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
TRX Aiding Function Control Value Range: Unit: Default Value: TRX Aiding Not Allowed, Allowed & Recover Forbidden, Allowed & Recover Immediately, Allowed & Recover When Check Res None Allowed & Recover When Check Res TRX Aiding Not Allowed indicates that the TRX aiding function is not allowed. Allowed & Recover Forbidden indicates that the TRX aiding function is allowed but switchback is forbidden after the faulty TRX is recovered. Description: Allowed & Recover Immediately indicates that the TRX aiding function is allowed and immediate switchback is allowed after the faulty TRX is recovered. Allowed & Recover When Check Res indicates that the TRX aiding function is allowed but immediate switchback is forbidden after the faulty TRX is recovered. The switchback is not performed until the resources are checked in the early morning. BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell. BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback can be performed after the originally configured BCCH TRX is recovered. Baseband hopping aiding: When the TRX that is involved in baseband hopping in the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is performed in the cell, baseband hopping aiding occurs and the cell is initialized to a non-hopping cell. Remarks: Baseband hopping aiding switchback: When all the TRXs that are involved in baseband hopping in the cell are recovered and the originally configured BCCH TRXs are normal, baseband hopping aiding switchback can be performed and the cell resumes to baseband hopping mode. If TRX aiding or switchback (BCCH aiding or baseband hopping aiding) occurs, the cell is reinitialized. For any types of BTS, no aiding is performed within 15 minutes after the cell is initialized.
Random Access Error Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 180
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-37
According the GSM protocols, the system can determine whether the received signal is the random access signal of the MS through the correlation of training sequence TSC (41 bits) and can calculate the TA value. This parameter specifies the correlation of the training sequence. Description: If the parameter is set to an oversmall value, the allowable error for the random access signal is high and the random access of the MS is easy. But the error report rate is high. If the parameter is set to an overgreat value, the error report rate of the MS is low but the normal access is difficult to be reported. See protocols 0408 and 0502. Remarks: None
RACH Min Access Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 5 For the versions later than the BTS3X, BTS3001C, and BTS3002C, the RACH Min Access Level function affects the access of the MS. The effect indicates that the system determines the threshold of the level for the random access of the MS. When the received level of the RACH burst is smaller than the threshold, the BTS regards this access as an invalid access and no decoding is performed. The addition of RACH Min Access Level in the BTS3X indicates that the system determines the threshold of the level for the random access of the MS. Only when the received level for the burst timeslot of the random access is greater than the threshold, the BTS regards that this timeslot has an access request. Because the RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than the RACH Min Access Level, infer that the RACH Min Access Level of the BTS24 is already shielded. For BTS2X (excluding BTS24), this parameter is invalid. This parameter must be set according to the actual sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS so that calls can be made when there is signal. Remarks: The RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than this parameter.
Description:
Power Deviation Indication Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
3-38
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power. None
Remarks:
Power Deviation (2dB) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 03 (mapping to 0 dB, 2 dB, 4 dB, and 6 dB) None 1 If the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after random access, the power that the MS uses is the MS maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation. See protocol 0508. None
Description:
Remarks:
Timer
T200 SDCCH (5 ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 5 milliseconds 60
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-39
This parameter determines the expiry value of the T200 timer on the SDCCH over the Um interface. The T200 timer prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement retransmission mechanism. Each message must be confirmed by the peer end. In unknown cases, both ends are waiting if a message is lost. At this time, the deadlock of the system occurs. Description: Therefore, the transmit end must establish a timer. When the timer expires, the transmit end regards that the receive end does not receive the message and then the transmit end retransmits the message. The number of retransmissions is determined by the N200. The T200 and the N200 ensure that the data link layer sequentially transmits data and that the transmission is free from errors. If the T200 timer is set to an oversmall value, the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If the N200 is set to an oversmall value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of transmission is reduced. If the T200 and the N200 are set to overgreat values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus the resources are wasted. Remarks: None
T200 FACCH/F (5ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 5 milliseconds 50 This parameter determines the expiry value of the T200 timer on the FACCH or full-rate channel over the Um interface. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
T200 FACCH/H (5ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 5 milliseconds 50
3-40
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter determines the expiry value of the T200 timer on the FACCH or half-rate channel over the Um interface. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Remarks:
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0 (10ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 10 milliseconds 150 This parameter determines the expiry value of the T200 timer on the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3 (10ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 10 milliseconds 200 This parameter determines the expiry value of the T200 timer on the SACCH when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
T200 SACCH SDCCH (10ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 10 milliseconds 60
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-41
Description:
This parameter determines the expiry value of the T200 timer on the SACCH on the SDCCH. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Remarks:
T200 SACCH SAPI3 (5ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 5 milliseconds 60 This parameter determines the expiry value of the T200 timer when the SDCCH supports SAPI3 services. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. For the function of the T200 timer and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
Use LAPDm N200 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter controls whether the BSC delivers the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS. Description: If the parameter is set to Yes, the LAPDm N200 parameter is delivered. If the parameter is set to No, the LAPDm N200 parameter is not delivered. Remarks: None
N200 of Establish Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 5254 None 5
3-42
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions when the several frames are establishing links. For the function of the N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Remarks:
N200 of Release Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 5254 None 5 This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions when the several frames are releasing links. For the function of the N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
N200 of SACCH Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 5254 None 5 This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions on the SACCH. For the function of the N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
N200 of SDCCH Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 23254 None 23 This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions on the SDCCH. For the function of the N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-43
N200 of FACCH/Half rate Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 29254 None 29 This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions on the FACCH (half-rate channel). For the function of the N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
N200 of FACCH/Full rate Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 34254 None 34 This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions on the FACCH (full-rate channel). For the function of the N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. None
Description:
Remarks:
Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter controls whether the BSC delivers the immediate assignment retransmit parameter to the BTS. Description: If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment retransmit parameter is delivered. If the parameter is set to No, the immediate assignment retransmit parameter is not delivered. Remarks: None
Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) Value Range: Unit: 0254 Millisecond
3-44
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4 Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message can be dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message cannot be dispatched or retransmitted. None
Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 15 None 2 This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate assignment message. When this number is reached, no retransmission is performed even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded. None
Description:
Remarks:
Call Control
Immediate Assignment Opt. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes: when the Transmission Mode of the BTS is Satellite transmission No: when the Transmission Mode of the BTS is Terrestrial transmission This parameter is used to concurrently deliver the channel activation message and immediate assignment command message to quicken the processing of signaling. Thus the response speed of the network is ensured. Description: This function is used in satellite transmission mode. In satellite transmission mode, the Immediate Assignment Opt parameter must be set to Yes to minimize the effect of the satellite transmission on time delay. In terrestrial transmission mode, the default value of this parameter is No. The setting of this parameter is related to the transmission mode of the BTS.
Remarks:
Short Message Uplink Disabled Value Range: Unit: Yes, No None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-45
Default Value:
No This parameter provides a switch for controlling the transmission of point-to-point short messages. If necessary, this switch can disable the transmission of uplink short messages in a specific cell so that sufficient radio channels can be seized by normal calls. If this parameter is set to Yes, radio channels cannot be seized for transmitting short messages no matter the MS is in the idle state or in the calling state.
Description:
Remarks:
Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during an upgrade. If transmitting short messages are allowed, this parameter must be set to No.
Short Message Downlink Disabled Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter provides a switch for controlling the transmission of point-to-point short messages. If necessary, this switch can disable the transmission of downlink short messages in a specific cell so that sufficient radio channels can be seized by normal calls. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MSs in the idle state cannot seize channels to receive short messages and the MSs in the calling state can still receive short messages without seizing additional channels. Remarks: Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this parameter must be set to No.
Description:
Frequency Band of Reassign Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Different Band, Same Band None Different Band In normal assignment procedure, after receiving the assignment failure message from the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately. Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment of radio interfaces. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased. When the BSC re-assigns radio channels, you can determine whether the re-assignment is performed in TRXs on the same band or on different bands. Thus the decrease in service quality due to interferences, faulty TRX paths, or faulty project constructions can be minimized. Remarks: None
Description:
3-46
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Max Assignment Retry Times Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 03 None 1 This parameter indicates the maximum number of assignment retry times. The parameter is valid when the TCH assignment retry is set to Yes. After the MS is accessed, the MSC sends the Assignment Request message to the BSC for TCH radio resources. If the current cell has no TCH that meets the requirements, the BSC attempts to originate a handover. The basis of the handover decision is the measurement report from the MS during the access. The handover uses the common handover algorithm. The MS is handed over to a neighboring cell and the neighboring cell provides speech services. If the target cell is in the same BSC, this is called intra-BSC directed retry. If the target cell is in a different BSC under the same MSC, this is called inter-BSC directed retry. If the target cell is in a different MSC, this is called inter-MSC directed retry. Directed retry can decrease the call access failures due to TCH congestion in the cell, increase the success rate of access, and enhance the network quality. Remarks: None
Description:
3G System Message
MSC Version Indication Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: R98 or below, R99 or above None R98 or below This parameter indicates the protocol version of the MSC that is networked with the BSC. The supported signaling varies with the protocol versions. None
Report Type Value Range: Unit: Common Measurement Report, Enhanced Measurement Report None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-47
Common Measurement Report This parameter indicates which measurement report is chosen. The BTS does not support EMR currently, so only Common Measurement Report is visible in the LMT interface. This field cannot be modified.
Serving Band Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 03 None 3 This parameter indicates the number of cells that meet the following conditions: The cell is in the current service band. The cell is in the best cell list. Remarks: None
Description:
Qsearch I Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 15 In idle mode, the MS starts to search for 3G cells if the signal level is below (0-7) or above (8-15) threshold. Description: 0: 98 dBm, 1: 94 dBm, , 6: 74 dBm, 7: (always), 8: 8 dBm, 9: 74 dBm, , 14: 54 dBm, 15: (never) Default value: (never) Remarks: None
Qsearch C Initial Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Use Qsearch_I, Always None Use Qsearch_I Always: always searching Use Qsearch_I: searching the threshold of 3G cells in idle mode This parameter indicates the mode for searching the threshold of 3G cells.
3-48
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
FDD Q Offset Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 8 Only when the average receive level of 3G cells is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the current service cell, the 3G cells can be reselected. Description: 0: (always select a cell if acceptable), 1: 28 dB, 2: 24 dB, , 15=28 dB Default value: 0 dB. Remarks: None
FDD REP QUANT Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: RSCP, Ec/N0 None RSCP Ec/N0 means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with C/I in GSM. RSCP, Received Signal Code Power None
FDD MULTIRAT Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 03 None 2 This parameter indicates the number of UTRAN FDD cells contained in the measurement report. None
FDD Qmin Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 None 0
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-49
Description:
This parameter indicates the threshold of level for the reselection of 3G cells. Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the cell can be one of the candidate cells for reselection. 0: 20 dB, 1: 19 dB, , 7: 13 dB Default value: 20 dB
Remarks:
None
Qsearch P Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 15 This parameter indicates the threshold of level for cell reselection in packet idle mode. Description: In packet idle mode, the MS starts to search for 3G cells if the signal level is below (0-7) or above (8-15) threshold. 0: 98 dBm, 1: 94 dBm, , 6: 74 dBm, 7: (always), 8: 78 dBm, 9: 74 dBm, , 14: 54 dBm, 15: (never) Default value: (never) Remarks: None
3G Search PRIO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether searching 3G cells is allowed when the BISC must be decoded. None
Invalid BSIC Reporting Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether a cell with invalid BISC is allowed in the measurement report. None
3-50
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Scale Order Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: +0, +10, Automatic dB +0 This parameter indicates the strength added to the received signal strength before the MS delivers the enhanced measurement report. For details, refer to protocol 05.08. None.
Qsearch C Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 15 In connection mode, the MS starts to search for 3G cells if the signal level is below (0-7) or above (8-15) threshold. Description: 0: 98 dBm, 1: 94 dBm, , 6: 74 dBm, 7: (always), 8: 78 dBm, 9: 74 dBm, , 14: 54 dBm, 15: (never) Default value: (never) Remarks: None
900 Reporting Offset Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 07 None 0 This parameter indicates the reporting offset for GSM900 cells. 0: 0 dB, 1: 6 dB, , 7: 42 dB, default value: 0 None
900 Reporting Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 None 0
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-51
This parameter indicates the reporting threshold for GSM900 cells. 0: 0 1: 6 dB Description: 6: 36 dB 7: Default value: 0 dB Remarks: None
1800 Reporting Offset Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 07 None 0 This parameter indicates the reporting offset for DCS1800 cells. 0: 0 dB, 1: 6 dB, , 7: 42 dB, default value: 0 None
1800 Reporting Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 07 None 0 This parameter indicates the reporting threshold for DCS1800 cells. 0: 0, 1: 6 dB, , 6: 36 dB, 7: , default value: 0 dB None
FDD Reporting Offset Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 07 None 0 This parameter indicates the reporting offset for 3G cells. 0: 0 dB, 1: 6 dB, , 7: 42 dB, default value: 0 None
FDD Reporting Threshold Value Range: 07
3-52
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None 0 This parameter indicates the reporting threshold for 3G cells. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB
Description:
6: 36 dB 7: Default value: 0 dB
Remarks:
None
AMR Call Control

AMR ACS (F) 4.75 Kbps12.2 Kbps Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 12.2 Kbps, 10.2 Kbps, 7.95 Kbps, 7.40 Kbps, 6.70 Kbps, 5.90 Kbps, 5.15 Kbps, 4.75 Kbps Kbps 10100101 Each bit indicates whether a coding rate exists in the ACS. If the bit is 1, infer that the mapping coding rate exists in the ACS. Description: If the bit is 0, infer that the mapping coding rate does not exist in the ACS. The number of concurrently selected data rates should be at least one and at most four. Remarks: None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 15 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-53
Remarks:
None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 30 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 45 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2
3-54
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n)] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1)], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 15 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-55
Remarks:
None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 30 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 45 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2
3-56
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2 (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR Starting Mode (F) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 03 None 0 The AMR Starting Mode (F) should be within the AMR ACS (F). None
AMR ACS (H) Value Range: 6.70 Kbps, 5.90 Kbps, 5.15 Kbps, 4.75 Kbps
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-57
Kbps 01111 Each bit indicates whether a coding rate exists in the ACS. If the bit is 1, infer that the mapping coding rate exists in the ACS. If the bit is 0, infer that the mapping coding rate does not exist in the ACS. The number of concurrently selected data rates should be at least one and at most four.
Description:
Remarks:
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 15 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2 (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 30 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3 (H) Value Range: Unit: 063 None
3-58
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
45 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions:
Description:
Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2
Remarks:
None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2 (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3 (H) Value Range: Unit: 015 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-59
Default Value:
Description:
Remarks:
None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 15 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2 (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 30 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3 (H) Value Range: Unit: 063 None
3-60
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
Description:
Remarks:
None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2 (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 015 None 7 Four groups of coding rate adjustment thresholds and coding rate adjustment hysteresis must meet the following conditions: Description: Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) < Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1), n = 1, 2 [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n) ] < [Coding rate adjustment threshold (n + 1) + Coding rate adjustment hysteresis (n + 1) ], n = 1, 2 Remarks: None
AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3 (H) Value Range: Unit: 015 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-61
Default Value:
Description:
Remarks:
None
AMR Starting Mode (H) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 03 None 0 The AMR Starting Mode (H) should be within the AMR ACS (H). None
3.4 Handover Parameters

3.4.1 Basic Handover Parameters
Co-BSC/MSC Adj Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the sequence of candidate cells is adjusted. After the sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority. None
Description:
Remarks:
SDCCH HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No
3-62
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates whether a handover between signaling channels is allowed. None
Intracell HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether an intra-cell handover is allowed. After an intra-cell handover, timeslots and TRXs are changed. This parameter does not affect Concentric Cell handover.
Intracell F-H HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the handover between full-rate channels and half-rate channels in the cell is allowed. None
Load HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether a traffic load-sharing handover is allowed. Load-sharing helps to reduce cell congestion, improve the success rate of assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells. Load-sharing functions only within the same BSC or in cells of the same layer. It applies to only TCH. If load handover is frequently required, TRX configuration and network planning should be properly adjusted. Remarks: In areas with tight frequency reuse, extra interference may occur if load sharing is enabled.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-63
MS Fast Moving HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether a fast moving handover is allowed. The fast moving handover enables a fast moving MS to hand over rapidly to a macro cell, thus reducing handovers. It is recommended that this algorithm be applied only to special areas, such as highways, to reduce the CPU load. Remarks: None
Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No The parameter indicates whether the emergency handover algorithm is allowed. Description: The emergency handover algorithm is used to prevent call drops when the received level of the MS drops rapidly. Generally this algorithm is not enabled until the conditions are met. To enable this algorithm, original MR is required for the BSC. Remarks: None
PBGT HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The parameter indicates whether a POWER BUDGET (PBGT) handover is allowed. Based on path loss, PBGT is used to search for a desired cell in real time and to judge whether handover is performed. The cell must provide less path loss and meet other requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, PBGT handover applies to only cells of the same level on the same layer and is triggered only over TCH. Proper use of PBGT handover helps to reduce over-cell coverage and co-channel interference. Remarks: None
Description:
3-64
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Level HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The parameter indicates whether the layer level handover is allowed. Description: The layer level handover is implemented based on layers and priorities. When this handover is enabled, traffic is routed to a cell with a higher priority. The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower the level is, the higher the priority is. Remarks: Layer level handover is not implemented when the comprehensive sequence (including basic sequence and network sequence) of the serving cell is the highest or when the level of the target cell is not greater than the Inter-layer HO Threshold.
Fringe HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The parameter indicates whether a fringe handover is allowed. Description: A fringe handover is used to prevent call drops in cell edges and initiated when the downlink/uplink level in the serving cell is lower than the fringe handover threshold. To implement fringe handover, the comprehensive sequence of the target cell must be higher than that of the serving cell.
Remarks:
BQ HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The parameter indicates whether a Bad Quality (BQ) handover is allowed. Description: BQ handover is triggered when Bit Error Ratio (BER) over uplink/downlink channels is higher than the triggering threshold. If BER rises, or signal strength drops, suspect that the signal power is low or channel interference increases. Inter-cell BQ handover is preferentially performed. If no target cell is available, intra-cell BQ handover can be implemented if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-65
TA HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The parameter indicates whether a Timing Advance (TA) handover is allowed. Description: A TA handover is triggered when the TA is higher than the triggering threshold. TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The longer the distance is, the greater the TA is. Remarks: None
Concentric Circles HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The parameter indicates whether a Concentric Cell handover is allowed. Description: A Concentric Cell handover is implemented to achieve mass coverage in the underlaid subcell and tight frequency reuse in the overlaid subcell, thus improving the system capability and service performance. A Concentric Cell handover consists of inward handover and outward handover. Remarks: None
Interference HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes The parameter indicates whether an interference handover is allowed. Description: An interference handover is triggered when the received level is higher than the received threshold, but the transmission quality is lower than the handover triggering threshold. Both downlink and uplink interference is judged, and inter-cell handover takes priority. If no target cell is available, intra-cell interference handover can be implemented if intra-cell handovers are allowed.
Remarks:
3-66
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 10 The parameter indicates the uplink received level threshold of an edge handover. When an MS is on the cell edge, an edge handover is triggered when the uplink received level is constantly lower than this parameter over a period. If PBGT handover is enabled, the corresponding edge handover threshold can be lowered. If PBGT handover is disabled, this parameter must be properly specified to avoid overlapping coverage and channel interference. This parameter should be adjusted based on the performance statistics and actual networks to achieve uplink-downlink balance. 25: urban areas with PBGT handover disabled 20: suburbs with a single BTS 20: urban areas with PBGT handover enabled Remarks: Edge handover uplink/downlink received level threshold < Uplink/downlink signal strength lower limit of G-II power control
Description:
Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 20 The parameter indicates the downlink received level threshold of an edge handover. When an MS is on the cell edge, an edge handover is triggered when the downlink received level is constantly lower than this parameter over a period. If PBGT handover is enabled, the corresponding edge handover threshold can be lowered. If PBGT handover is disabled, this parameter must be properly specified to avoid manual overlapping coverage and channel interference. This parameter should be adjusted based on the performance statistics and actual networks to achieve uplink-downlink balance. 30: Urban areas with PBGT handover disabled 25: Suburbs with a single BTS 25: Urban areas with PBGT handover enabled Remarks: Edge handover uplink/downlink received level threshold < Uplink/downlink signal strength lower limit of G-II power control
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-67
Edge HO Watch Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 3 This parameter indicates the period when uplink/downlink received levels are measured to determine whether an edge handover is triggered. None
Edge HO Valid Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 2 This parameter indicates the period when the uplink/downlink received level is constantly lower than the triggering threshold. None
Layer HO Watch Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 3 This parameter indicates the time for queuing candidate cells. None
Layer HO Valid Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 2 If a cell is ranked 1 of the candidate cells for a whole segment of measurement period, this cell is called the best cell. None
3-68
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
PBGT Watch Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 3 This parameter indicates the period when the path losses of neighboring cells are measured. Thus, operators can determine whether a PBGT handover is triggered. None
PBGT Valid Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 2 This parameter indicates the period that satisfies PBGT handover. None
Intracell F-H HO State Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 5 This parameter indicates the time threshold that satisfies full rate to half rate handover. None
Intracell F-H HO Last Time Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 4 This parameter indicates the period that satisfies full rate to half rate handover. None
F2H HO th Value Range: 039
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-69
dBm 30 This parameter indicates the threshold of a handover from full rate data TCH (TCHF) to half rate data TCH (TCHH).
Description:
For AMR calls, intra-cell TCHF to TCHH handover is triggered when TCHF is in use and Radio Quality Indication (RQI) is constantly higher than this threshold. None
Remarks:
H2F HO th Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 039 dBm 10 This parameter indicates the threshold of TCHH to TCHF handover. Description: For AMR calls, intra-cell TCHH to TCHF handover is triggered when TCHH is in use and Radio Quality Indication (RQI) is constantly lower than this threshold. None
Remarks:
Inter-layer HO Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 25 The parameter indicates the threshold of an inter-layer handover based on priority. When the downlink level of a cell is lower than this threshold, the cell takes low priority as far as comprehensive sequence is concerned. Make sure that the received level of the destination cell is higher than this threshold in inter-layer handover or load handover. Otherwise, the MS may be handed from a cell with heavy load and high level (high priority cell) to a cell with light load and low level (low priority cell), thus leading to call drops.
Description:
Remarks:
Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 3
3-70
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover. It is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers. Description: Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO hysteresis Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a neighboring cell = Inter-layer HO Threshold + Inter-layer HO hysteresis Remarks: None
Min DL Level on Candidate Cell Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 15 This parameter indicates the lower threshold of downlink received level when a cell becomes a candidate cell. This parameter must be appropriately specified. If it is too high, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. If it is too low, an unwanted cell may become the target cell, thus leading to handover failures or call drops. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the receiving level minus this parameter is greater than the minimum access level offset.
Remarks:
Concentric Circles HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes,No None No This parameter indicates whether a concentric circle handover is allowed. None
3.4.2 Advanced Handover Parameters

HO Control
Min Interval for TCH HOs Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 060 Seconds 2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-71
This parameter indicates the duration of a timer, which starts upon new TCH assignment and triggers handover upon timeout. Description: This parameter is used to avoid incorrect handover caused by inaccurate measurements at the early stage of call establishment. The value of this parameter can be small when the MR is processed by the BTS. The value of this parameter can be great when the MR is processed by the BSC. Remarks: None
Min Interval for SDCCH HOs Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 060 Seconds 2 This parameter indicates the duration of a timer, which starts upon new SDCCH assignment and triggers handover upon timeout. Description: It is used to avoid incorrect handover caused by inaccurate measurements at the early stage of call establishment. The value of this parameter should be small when the MR is processed by the BTS. The value of this parameter should be great when the MR is processed by the BSC. Remarks: None
Min Interval for Consecutive HOs Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 060 Seconds 4 This parameter indicates the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. Description: It is used to avoid frequent handover. A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only after the timer expires. Remarks: None
Min Interval for Emerg HOs Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 060 Seconds 4
3-72
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers. A timer starts after an emergency handover is complete, and a subsequent emergency handover is allowed only after the timer expires. None
Remarks:
Inter-BSC SDCCH HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether an inter-BSC SDCCH handover is allowed. An inter-BSC SDCCH handover is triggered when an MS succeeds in requesting SDCCH but fails to request TCH in a BSC. Description: An inter-BSC SDCCH handover is also triggered when the following conditions are met: The handover time of the SDCCH initial access expires. The required handover conditions are met. An MS is handed over to another BSC. The MS is not assigned with TCH. Remarks: None
Penalty Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether penalty is given to certain cells, including target cells where handover fails and serving cells where handover is triggered due to excessive TA or poor signal strength. Description: A penalty is given when handover fails in a target cell due to congestion, thus preventing handing the MS to the target cell again. A penalty is given to the original serving cell when ping-pong handovers occur due to excessive TA or poor signal strength. This penalty applies to both intra- and inter-BSC cells. Remarks: None
MS Power Prediction after HO Value Range: Yes, No
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-73
None No This parameter indicates whether the MS uses the optimum transmit power to access a new channel after the handover. Using the optimum transmit power helps to reduce interference and improve the service performance. None
Description:
Remarks:
MR Preprocessing Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the BTS pre-processes the MR. When this parameter is set to No, the MR is processed by the BSC, in which case, both Transfer original MR, Transfer BS/MS power class and Sent Freq of preprocessed MR are invalid. Description: When this parameter is set to Yes, the load over Abis interface and that over the BSC are reduced, thus shortening the response time and improving the network performance. Meanwhile, this parameter determines the location where power control is performed. If this parameter is set to Yes, power control is performed by the BTS. Otherwise, the power control is performed by the BSC. Thus, when specifying this parameter, check whether the BTS supports power control. BTS24, BTS3X, BTS3001C, BTS3002C, and dual-transceiver BTSs all support MR preprocessing. For BTS22C, this parameter must be set to No. Remarks: BTS2X products (including BTS23 and BTS22C) support G-I power control instead of G-II power control. In 16 K mode, if a TRX is configured with two or more SDCCHs, or if SD Dynamic Allocation Allowed is enabled, it is recommended that you enable BTS MR pre-processing. Huawei recommends that the measurement report is reported once per second.
Transfer Original MR Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No
3-74
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates whether the original MR is transferred to the BSC after the BTS pre-processes the MR. When the parameter is set to Yes, the BTS transfers to the BSC both the processed MR and the original MR. In case of 4:1 configuration, this parameter must be set to No if SDCCH/8 is greater than 2.
Remarks:
Transfer BS/MS Power Class Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the original BS/MS power class is transferred to the BSC. When MR pre-processing is enabled, uplink and downlink balance measurement is affected if this parameter is set to No. In addition, power compensation handovers, such as PBGT handovers, load handovers, and Concentric Cell handovers, may become abnormal.
Remarks:
Sent Freq of Preprocessed MR Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Do not Report, Twice every second, Once every second, Once every two seconds, Once every four seconds, None Twice every second and Once every second for 4:1 configuration This parameter indicates the frequency for transferring the preprocessed MR to the BSC. None
Cell HO Data
System Flux Threshold for Load HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 011 None 10 This parameter indicates the system flux threshold of load handover. Description: System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. A load handover is allowed only when the system flux is lower than this threshold. Otherwise, unexpected situations may occur. Thus, this parameter is preferably low.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-75
Remarks:
None
Load HO Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 06 None 6 This parameter indicates the threshold of load handover. Load handover is triggered when the TCH usage percentage reaches or exceeds this threshold. Even if the load handover is not enabled, this parameter and Load Req on Candidate Cell, affect the sequence of candidate cells (the eleventh bit of the 16-bit sequence). Therefore, improper setting of this parameter may result in PBGT handover (or other handovers) failure when the cell load is heavy. The TCH usage percentage corresponding to each grade is adjustable.
Remarks:
Load Req. on Candidate Cell Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 06 None 5 This parameter indicates the threshold of accepting a handover request. If the TCH usage percentage in a target cell is equal to or higher than this threshold, the target cell refuses to accept the handover request. Even if load handover is not enabled, this parameter and Load HO Threshold affect the sequence of candidate cells (the eleventh bit of the 16-bit sequence). Therefore, improper setting of this parameter may result in PBGT handover (or other handovers) failure when the cell load is heavy. The TCH usage percentage corresponding to each grade is adjustable.
Remarks:
Load HO Bandwidth Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 25 Together with the fringe handover threshold, this parameter indicates whether a load handover is allowed. Description: Only when the received level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO bandwidth}, a load handover is allowed.
3-76
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Load HO Step Period Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 Seconds 10 This parameter indicates the period required for each level of load handover. Description: When a serving cell meets the handover conditions, all connections in the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, thus leading to sudden increase of CPU load and possible call drops when the target cell is congested. Therefore, these requests are divided into steps based on the receiving strength. None
Remarks:
Load HO Step Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 163 None 5 This parameter indicates the bandwidth of each step during level-based load handover. Description: During level-based load handover, the bandwidth threshold of handover increases by a step bandwidth after a handover period ends. This parameter must be less than Load HO Bandwidth. Remarks: None
MS Fast-moving Watch Cells Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 110 None 3 This parameter indicates the number of micro cells used for judging whether an MS is in the fast moving state. Description: If this parameter is excessively high, it is difficult to reduce the system load effectively. If this parameter is excessively low, the judgment is inaccurate. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-77
MS Fast-moving Valid Cells Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 110 None 2 This parameter indicates the number of cells where the MS moves fast. Fast moving handover is triggered when this parameter satisfies the required condition. None
MS Fast-moving Time Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 15 This parameter indicates the threshold for judging whether an MS moves fast across a cell. Description: The threshold is obtained based on the cell radius and specified velocity. If the time for crossing a cell is lower than this threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Conditions for triggering fast-moving handover are as follows: Remarks: The serving cell does not belong to level-4. The optimum target cell does not belong to level-4. A neighboring cell has a macro cell.
Max Consecutive HO Times Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 120 None 3 This parameter indicates the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed. Description: If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is less than a specified threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. Intra-cell handover is forbidden if the number of consecutive handovers exceeds this threshold. Remarks: None
3-78
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Forbidden Time after Max Times Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1200 Seconds 20 This parameter indicates the timer that starts when the threshold of maximum consecutive intra-cell handovers is reached. Intra-cell handovers is allowed only when the timer expires. None
Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1200 Seconds 6 This parameter indicates the period for judging whether two continuous intra-cell handovers are consecutive. None
Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 30 This parameter indicates the penalty given to the level in a neighboring cell when an MS is moving fast. Description: Only the cells in the umbrella layer can give penalty to the cells in other three layers. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of fast moving expires. Remarks: None
Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 40
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-79
Description:
This parameter indicates the period during which penalty is performed on the neighboring cells of the fast moving MS. During this period, penalty on the neighboring cells (on only the other three layers except the umbrella layer) of fast moving MS is valid. None
Remarks:
UL Expected Level at HO Access Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 35 This parameter indicates the expected uplink received level on a new channel after an MS is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is consistent with UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in G-II power control. None
Description:
Remarks:
K Bias Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 063 None 0 This parameter indicates the bias for K sequence. None
Max Resend Times of Phy Info Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 None 30
3-80
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the maximum times of resending physical information. During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS returns physical information to the MS through the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts. The physical information containing information on different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS re-sends the physical information to the MS. If the number of resending times exceeds this parameter (Ny1) and the BTS has received no correct SAMB frame, the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message, which also indicates handover failure. Then, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. For details, refer to protocols 0858 and 0408. This parameter can be correspondingly increased when handover becomes slow or the success rate is lowered due to clock problems or poor transmission. Remarks: If Ny1 X T3105 is greater than the interval (120 to 180 ms) between EST IND and HO DETECT, handover may be successful. Otherwise, handover fails.
Description:
T3105 (10ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 10 ms 7 Refer to parameter Max Resend Times of Phy Info. For details, refer to protocols 0408 and 0858. Description: The physical information is sent through FACCH, which is sent every four TDMA frames and takes 18 ms. Thus, 20 ms, that is setting this parameter to 2, is the minimum value to ensure fast and continuous physical information transmission. None
Remarks:
Concentric Data
UL to OL HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-81
This parameter indicates whether an underlay (UL) to overlay (OL) handover is allowed. None
OL to UL HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether an OL to UL handover is allowed. None
RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None The default value is generally set to Yes. When the cell is a dual-timeslot cell, the default value is set to No. This parameter indicates whether the downlink receive level is used to determine a Concentric Cell handover. None
RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None The default value is generally set to Yes. When the cell is a dual-timeslot cell, the default value is set to No. This parameter indicates whether the downlink receiving quality is used to determine a Concentric Cell handover. None
TA for UO HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the TA is used to determine a Concentric Cell handover.
3-82
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
UO Signal Intensity Difference Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None The levels of overlaid and underlaid subcells must be measured on site. When the two subcells use different antennas, multiple points should be measured to ensure precision. The default value is generally set to 0. This parameter indicates the signal intensity compensation between the overlaid and underlaid subcells. Description: It equals the sum of power difference between overlaid and underlaid power amplifiers, insertion loss difference between combiners, path loss difference caused by antennas, and path loss difference caused by frequencies. The parameter is invalid when Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed. Remarks: None
RX_LEV Threshold Value Range: Unit: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 35: This parameter is greater than the sum of fringe handover threshold and UO signal intensity difference. 0: The cell is a dual-timeslot extended cell. 40: The cell is a mixed cell. This is one of the parameters that determine the regions of overlaid and underlaid subcells. It is invalid when Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed. When Enhanced Concentric Cell is not allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. None
Default Value:
Description:
Remarks:
RX_LEV Hysteresis Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 5 When the cell is a dual-timeslot cell, the default value is set to 0.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-83
Description:
This is one of the parameters that determine the regions of overlaid and underlaid subcells. It is invalid when Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed. When Enhanced Concentric Cell is not allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. None
Remarks:
RX_QUAL Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 070 (RQ (07) % 10) None The default value is 60, but it is 70 when the cell is a dual-timeslot extended cell. This is one of the parameters that determine the regions of overlaid and underlaid subcells. When Enhanced Concentric Cell is not allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. When Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. Remarks: None
Description:
TA Threshold Value Range: Unit: 0255 Bit period (a bit period denotes 0.55 km) 63 Default Value:
Note: TA threshold is not used to distinguish the boundary between overlaid and underlaid subcells.
This is one of the parameters that determine the regions of overlaid and underlaid subcells. When Enhanced Concentric Cell is not allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. Description: When Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. This parameter must be less than the TA threshold of an emergency handover.
3-84
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
TA Hysteresis Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Bit period (a bit period corresponds to 0.55 km) The default value is generally set to 0. When the cell is a dual-timeslot cell, the default value is set to 3. This is one of the parameters that determine the regions of overlaid and underlaid subcells. When Enhanced Concentric Cell is not allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. When Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. Remarks: None
Description:
UO HO Watch Time Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 016 Seconds 5 This parameter determines whether a concentric cell handover is triggered. None
UO HO Valid Time Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 016 Seconds 4 This parameter determines whether a concentric cell handover is triggered. None
Assign Optimum Layer Value Range: System Optimization, Overlaid Subcell, Underlaid Subcell, No Preference
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-85
None Underlaid Subcell: The cell system is GSM900 or DCS1800. System Optimization: The cell system is not GSM900 or DCS1800. This parameter indicates the method of TCH assignment a concentric cell. System Optimization: The system selects the optimum serving layer according to the MR provided through the SDCCH.
Description:
Underlaid Subcell: Channel assignment in the underlaid subcell has higher priority. Overlaid Subcell: Channel assignment in the overlaid subcell has higher priority. No Preference: No specific instruction is given.
Remarks:
None
Assign-optimum-level Threshold Value Range: Unit: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None When the uplink and the downlink are not balanced, the default value = receive level + balance margin for uplink and downlink Default Value: When the uplink and the downlink are balanced, the default value can be set to 35, which is the same as RX_LEV Threshold. When the cell is a dual-timeslot cell, the default value is set to 0. When the cell is a hybrid cell, the default value is set to 40. When the optimal layer is selected through system optimization, the current SDCCH level can be estimated (inserted/filtered) based on the uplink measurement result in the previous SDCCH MR. Then, overlaid and underlaid subcells are allocated by comparing this parameter with the received level of SDCCH, and by comparing TA with the TA threshold of optimum assignment. The MS is allocated with overlaid subcell only when the received level is greater than level threshold and TA is smaller than the TA threshold. Otherwise, the MS is allocated with the underlaid cell. Remarks: None
Description:
TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Bit period (a bit period corresponds to 0.55 km) 63
3-86
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
When the optimal layer is selected through system optimization, the current SDCCH level can be estimated (inserted/filtered) based on the uplink measurement result in the previous SDCCH MR. Then, overlaid and underlaid subcells are allocated by comparing this parameter and the received level of SDCCH, and by comparing TA and the TA threshold of optimum assignment. The MS is allocated with overlaid subcell only when the received level is greater than level threshold and TA is smaller than the TA threshold. Otherwise, the MS is allocated with the underlaid cell.
Remarks:
When this parameter is set to 0, the MS is allocated with the underlaid cell.
TA Pref of Imme-Assign Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether access_delay is used in the channel request message for immediate assignment. Description: When this parameter is set to No, a channel in the underlaid subcell is assigned. When this parameter is set to Yes, a channel in the overlaid subcell is assigned if access_delay is less than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. If not, a channel in the underlaid subcell is assigned. Remarks: None
TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Bit period (a bit period corresponds to 0.55 km) 63: Dual-timeslot extended cells 0: Other cells This parameter indicates the threshold of overlaid cell-based immediate assignment. For details, refer to the description of TA Pref of Imme-Assign Allowed. None
Description:
Remarks:
Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC Value Range: Unit: System Optimization, Overlaid Subcell, Underlaid Subcell, No Preference None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-87
The default value is System Optimization. Default Value: For a dual-timeslot extended cell or a hybrid cell, the default value is Underlaid Subcell. This parameter indicates the method of channel assignment for intra-BSC handover in a concentric cell. System Optimization: The BCCH of the target cell is specified in the handover request. Then, the target cell compares only the received level with RX_LEV Threshold, thus selecting the layer with higher priority. UnderLaid Subcell: Channel assignment in the underlaid subcell has higher priority. OverLaid Subcell: Channel assignment in the overlaid subcell has higher priority. No Preference: Channels are assigned based on routine algorithms. Remarks: None
Description:
Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer Value Range: Unit: Overlaid Subcell, Underlaid Subcell, No Preference None Underlaid Subcell (common networks) Default Value: Overlaid Subcell (dual-frequency networks) Underlaid Subcell (dual-frequency networks with decreasing success rate of handover) This parameter indicates the method of selecting an optimum layer for an incoming handover. The BCCH carrier must be configured in the underlaid subcell. The SDCCH must be configured in the underlaid subcell. Remarks: Concentric Cell handover is forbidden if both RX-LEV Threshold and RX-LEV Hysteresis (or both TA Threshold and TA Hysteresis) are set to 63. The data configuration for a dual-timeslot extended cell adopts Concentric Cell techniques.
Description:
OtoU HO Received Level Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 20
3-88
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This is one of the parameters that determine the regions of overlaid and underlaid subcells. Description: When Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. None
Remarks:
UtoO HO Received Level Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 30 This is one of the parameters that determine the regions of overlaid and underlaid subcells. Description: When Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed, the regions are co-determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. None
Remarks:
UtoO Traffic HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No: dual-timeslot cells Yes: other cells This parameter indicates whether the traffic in the underlaid subcell determines the underlaid to overlaid (UL to OL) handover. Description: When this parameter is set to Yes, the handover is allowed only when the traffic in the underlaid cell is equal to or greater than Traffic Threshold of Underlay. When this parameter is set to No, the traffic is not taken into consideration. Remarks: This parameter is valid only when Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed.
Traffic Threshold of Underlay Value Range: Unit: 06, percentage of busy TCHs to all TCHs available in the underlaid subcell None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-89
Default Value:
5 This parameter, represented through percentage of busy TCHs to all TCHs available in the underlaid subcell, indicates the threshold of UL to OL handover. When UL to OL handover is not allowed, the traffic is not taken into consideration.
Description:
Remarks:
This parameter is valid only when both Enhanced Concentric Cell and UL to OL traffic handover are allowed.
Underlay HO Step Period(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 Seconds 5 This parameter indicates the interval between two grades of level-based handovers. Description: When multiple UL to OL handover requests are initiated simultaneously, it is possible that calls with low level are handed over. This does not conform to the principle that the call with the best quality should be handed over firstly. Thus, level grade-based handover is used to hand over high-level calls with higher priority. This parameter is valid only when Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed.
Remarks:
Underlay HO Step Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 163 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 5 This parameter indicates the length of a grade in level grade-based UL to OL handover. Thus, high-level calls are handed over with higher priority. Description: After a step period of UL to OL handover, the handover band is decreased by the length of a grade. This parameter and Underlay HO Step Period control the level band of the step-by-step handover from underlaid subcells to overlaid subcells together. The time for the handover band to step down for Underlay HO Step Level is Underlay HO Step Period. Remarks: This parameter is valid only when Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed.
3-90
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 10 This parameter indicates the penalty time for forbidding ping-pong handovers. Description: After an OL to UL handover is performed, UL to OL handover is not allowed before the penalty time expires. If this parameter is set to 0, a UL to OL handover is allowed when required. Remarks: This parameter is valid only when Enhanced Concentric Cell is allowed.
Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fails(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 10255 Seconds 40 After a UL to OL handover fails, no UL to OL handover request is allowed before the penalty time expires. None
Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fails(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 Seconds 10 After an OL to UL handover fails, no OL to UL handover request is allowed before the penalty time expires. None
MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 08 None 3 This parameter indicates the threshold of UL to OL handover failures. UL to OL handover is not allowed if the number of handover failures reaches this threshold.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-91
Remarks:
When this parameter is set to 0, not this threshold but the penalty time restricts the permission of handover.
Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fails(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 30 This parameter indicates the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers. Description: Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover request is allowed if the previous full-half handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch. None.
Remarks:
Filter Penalty Data

Allowed MR Number Lost Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 031 None 4 This parameter indicates the number of MRs allowed to be lost in succession. Description: When this threshold is not reached, the last two MRs received are gathered and the lost MR is estimated based on the linear interpolation. When this threshold is reached, all previous MRs are discarded, and calculations are made again when new MRs are received. The handover may fail. Thus, this parameter should be appropriately specified. MRs fail to be decoded correctly when the signal strength in the active serving cell is poor. When this threshold is reached, all previous MRs are discarded and handover may fail. Thus, it is advised to assign this parameter with a greater value to enable emergency handover.
Remarks:
Filter Length for TCH Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 131 None 4
3-92
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the number of MRs used for averaging the TCH signal strength. Description: This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is too large, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the response is delayed, thus affecting the network performance. Remarks: None
Filter Length for TCH Qual Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 131 None 4 This parameter indicates the number of MRs used for averaging the TCH signal quality. None
Filter Length for SDCCH Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 131 None 2 This parameter indicates the number of MRs used for averaging the SDCCH signal strength. Description: It is recommended that you assign this parameter with a lower value because the SDCCH occupation time is shorter than the TCH occupation time. None
Remarks:
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 131 None 2 This parameter indicates the number of MRs used for averaging the SDCCH signal quality. Description: It is recommended that you assign this parameter with a lower value because the SDCCH occupation time is shorter than the TCH occupation time. None
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-93
Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 131 None 4 This parameter indicates the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighboring cells. Description: This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is too large, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the response is delayed, thus affecting the network performance. Remarks: None
Filter Length for TA Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 131 None 4 This parameter indicates the number of MRs used for TA averaging. None
Penalty Level after HO Fail Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 30 This parameter indicates the penalty level given to a target cell. A penalty level is given to a target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following reasons: Cell congestion A message indicating internal handover refusal is received. Description: A message indicating Um interface handover failure is received during out-going BSC handover. A message indicating Um interface handover failure is received during internal handover. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of handover failure expires. Remarks: None
3-94
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 10 This parameter indicates the penalty time given to a target cell. Description: During the penalty time, the received level of the target cell where a handover fails is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and the success rate of handover is improved. None
Remarks:
Penalty Level after BQ HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 63 This parameter indicates the penalty level given to the original serving cell where emergency handover is performed due to bad quality. Description: After emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the received level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of handover due to bad quality expires. Remarks: None
Penalty Time after BQ HO (s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 15 This parameter indicates the penalty time given to the original serving cell where emergency handover is performed due to bad quality. Description: During the penalty time, the received level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. None
Remarks:
Penalty Level after TA HO Value Range: 063
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-95
None 63 This parameter indicates the penalty level given to the original serving cell where emergency handover is performed due to TA.
Description:
After emergency handover is performed due to TA, the received level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of handover due to TA expires.
Remarks:
None
Penalty Time after TA HO(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 30 This parameter indicates the penalty time given to the original serving cell where emergency handover is performed due to TA. Description: During the penalty time, the received level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. None
Remarks:
Emergency HO Data
TA Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Bit period (A bit period corresponds to 0.55 km.) 255 This parameter indicates the TA threshold of triggering emergency handover. Emergency handover is triggered when TA is equal to or greater than this threshold. None
Description:
Remarks:
DL Qual. Threshold Value Range: Unit: 070 (RQ (07) % 10) None
3-96
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
60 This parameter indicates the downlink receiving quality threshold of triggering an emergency handover.
Description:
When frequency hopping or DTX is enabled, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 70. When an emergency handover is triggered, inter-cell handover takes priority. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and intra-cell handovers are allowed.
Remarks:
None
UL Qual. Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 070 (RQ (07) % 10) None 60 This parameter indicates the uplink receiving quality threshold of triggering an emergency handover. Description: When frequency hopping or DTX is enabled, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 70. When an emergency handover is triggered, inter-cell handover takes priority. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and intra-cell handovers are allowed. Remarks: None
UL Qual. Threshold for Interf HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 070 (RQ (07) % 10) None 50 This parameter indicates the uplink receiving quality threshold of triggering an interference handover. When frequency hopping or DTX is enabled, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 60. Description: When an interference handover is triggered, candidate cells are routinely sequenced and a target cell is selected. If the current cell is ranked 1 and the handover switch in the cell is on, then intra-cell handover is performed in the current cell. If the current cell is not ranked 1 or the handover switch in the cell is off, then an intra-cell handover is performed in the cell ranked 2. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-97
DL Qual. Threshold for Interf HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 070 (RQ (07) % 10) None 50 This parameter indicates the downlink receiving quality threshold of triggering an interference handover. When frequency hopping or DTX is enabled, it is recommended that you set this parameter to 60. When an interference handover is triggered, candidate cells are routinely sequenced and a target cell is selected. Description: If the current cell is ranked 1 and the handover switch in the cell is on, then intra-cell handover is performed in the current cell. the handover switch in the cell is off, then intra-cell handover is performed in the cell that is ranked 2. If the current cell is not ranked 1, directly select a cell without determining the status of the handover switch in the cell. Remarks: None
UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 15 This parameter indicates the uplink received level threshold of triggering an interference handover. When an interference handover is triggered, candidate cells are routinely sequenced and a target cell is selected. If the current cell is ranked 1 and Description: the handover switch in the cell is on, then intra-cell handover is performed in the current cell. the handover switch in the cell is off, then intra-cell handover is performed in the cell that is ranked 2. If the current cell is not ranked 1, directly select a cell without determining the status of the handover switch in the cell. Remarks: None
3-98
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 25 This parameter indicates the downlink received level threshold of triggering an interference handover. When an interference handover is triggered, candidate cells are routinely sequenced and a target cell is selected. If the current cell is ranked 1 and Description: the handover switch in the cell is on, then intra-cell handover is performed in the current cell. the handover switch in the cell is off, then intra-cell handover is performed in the cell that is ranked 2. If the current cell is not ranked 1, directly select a cell without determining the status of the handover switch in the cell. Remarks: None
Uplink Level Short-term Filter Length Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 3 This parameter indicates the length of a short-term filter for uplink levels. Through averaging successive MRs, the filter helps to ensure comprehensive and precise measurement results. None
Description:
Remarks:
Filter Parameter A1A8 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 020 None 10 These parameters are used to configure the parameters related to fast dropping filters. The sum of these eight parameters must equal 80.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-99
Filter Parameter B Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0200 None 0 This is one of the parameters that determine whether a handover is required due to fast dropping levels. The levels drop fast if the following condition is met: Description:
( A1 10 ) X 1 + ( A 2 10 ) X 2 + ( A 3 10 ) X 3 + ( A 4 10 ) X 4 + ( A 5 10 ) X 5 + ( A 6 + ( A 7 10 ) X 7 + ( A8 10 ) X 8 < B
10 ) X 6
In the algorithm above, X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, and X8 indicate the uplink received levels of the last eight MRs in the queue. Remarks: None
No Dl Mr. HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No The host uses this switch to control the handover algorithm without downlink measurement report . If this parameter is set to 0, the no handover algorithm without downlink measurement report is disabled. Therefore, handover decision without downlink measurement report is not allowed in this cell. If this parameter is set to 1, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is enabled. Therefore, handover decision without downlink measurement report is allowed in this cell. Remarks: None
Description:
No Dl Mr. Ul Qual HO Limit Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 070 (RQ (07) % 10) None 60
3-100
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the uplink receiving quality threshold of triggering an emergency handover when no measurement result on downlink channels is contained in the MR. Description: The emergency handover is allowed only when the filtered uplink receiving quality crossed this threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, inter-cell handover takes priority. Intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and intra-cell handovers are allowed. Remarks: None
Cons. No Dl Mr. HO Allowed Limit Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 064 None 8 This parameter indicates the upper threshold of consecutive MRs containing no downlink measurement result for a call. Description: Each call is configured with a global timer, which counts the number of consecutive MRs containing no downlink measurement. When the timer exceeds this threshold, the handover is disabled and the timer is reset. None
Remarks:
3G HO Data
Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the outgoing-RAT handover (from 2G to 3G) is allowed. None
Better 3G Cell HO Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-101
Description:
This parameter indicates whether the better 3G cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: better 3G cell handover algorithm allowed No: better 3G cell handover algorithm not allowed None
Remarks:
Inter-RAT HO Preference Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Preference for 2G Cell, Preference for 3G Cell, Preference for 2G By Threshold None Preference for 2G By Threshold This parameter indicates whether a 2G cell or a 3G cell is preferentially selected during cell handover. None
HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 25 When the Inter-RAT HO Preference is set to 2 (2G cells are preferentially selected according to the threshold), 3G cells are the preferential selection for handover if the receive level of the first candidate 2G cell is smaller than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell. When the Inter-RAT HO Preference is set to 2 (2G cells are preferentially selected according to the threshold), 2G cells are the preferential selection for handover if the receive level of the first candidate 2G cell is greater than HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell. None
Description:
Remarks:
RSCP Threshold for Better 3G CELL HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 50 If the Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, better 3G cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of a 3G neighboring cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G CELL HO in a period.
Description:
3-102
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G CELL HO Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 049 None 35 If the Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, better 3G cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of a 3G neighboring cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G CELL HO in a period. None
Description:
Remarks:
3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 116 Seconds 5 This parameter indicates the measurement time of the 3G better cell handover algorithm. None
3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 116 Seconds 4 During the decision of 3G better cell handover algorithm, 3G better cell handover is originated only when the period that meets the conditions of the 3G better cell handover algorithm in the measurement period is greater than 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time. This parameter indicates the valid time of the 3G better cell handover algorithm. Remarks: None
Description:
Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 031 None 2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-103
This parameter indicates the length of the filter for the MEAN_BEP signaling channel when the type of the measurement report is EMR. None
Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None 6 This parameter indicates the length of the filter for the MEAN_BEP voice channel when the type of the measurement report is EMR. None
Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None 2 This parameter indicates the length of the filter for the CV_BEP signaling channel when the type of the measurement report is EMR. None
Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None 6 This parameter indicates the length of the filter for the CV_BEP voice channel when the type of the measurement report is EMR. None
Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 031 None 2
3-104
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the length of the filter for the REP_QUANT signaling channel when the type of the measurement report is EMR. None
Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 031 None 6 This parameter indicates the length of the filter for the REP_QUANT voice channel when the type of the measurement report is EMR. None
2G BA2 Table
2G BA2 Table Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: None None BCCH frequencies of 2G neighboring cells This parameter records the list of the 2G neighboring cells in which the MS rearches while making a call. The list information is delivered in the system messages 5, 5bis, and 5ter. During network optimization, all the BCCH frequencies in the network can be put into the BA2 table. Thus you can use the performance measurement function of the undefined neighboring cells on the M2000 Client to find the neighboring cells that are not configured with neighborhood relationship. Huawei recommends that the settings are performed based on the existing neighboring cells and that the number of the set neighboring cells does not exceed 15. A maximum of 64 neighboring cells can be configured in the BA table, but a maximum of only 32 neighboring cells with different frequencies can be configured. In auto mode, you can fill in the BA1 and BA2 tables on the LMT according to the cell neighborhood relationship. In manual mode, you can maintain the BA table. If you modify the neighborhood relationship of a cell, such as adding a neighboring cell or deleting a cell, you should maintain the BA1 and BA2 tables.
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-105
3G BA2 Table
DL UARFCN Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 016383 None None This parameter records the list of the 3G neighboring cells in which the MS searches while making a call. The list is delivered in the 2QUTER/MI system message. This parameter defines the downlink frequency number in a cell. Different band indications map with different value ranges of the frequency number.
Remarks:
Scrambling Code Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0511 None None This parameter indicates the scrambling code of a 3G cell. The scrambling code distinguishes MSs or cells. The code is used after spreading. Therefore, the bandwidth of a signal is not changed. Signals from different sources are differentiated. Scrambling prevents several transmitters from using the same code word for spreading. On the uplink, the scrambling function differentiates MSs. On the downlink, the function differentiates cells. Remarks: None
Description:
Diversity Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No This parameter is the diversity indication of a 3G cell. This parameter indicates whether the transmit diversity mode on the common channel in a cell is activated. None
3-106
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3.5 Power Control Parameters

3.5.1 Basic Power Control Parameters
PC Interval Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 115 Measurement report period (480 milliseconds on the TCH; 470 milliseconds on the SDCCH) 3 Minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands If the value of this parameter is too high, the power control interval is too great, and thus the power control may be delayed. If the value of this parameter is too small, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources.
Remarks:
UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 35 The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The signal is not adjusted between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Description: This parameter determines the upper threshold of the uplink signal for power control. If the signal level exceeds this threshold, calculate a decreased value (=
Upper Threshold + Lower Threshold 2
Received
Level). This value and the maximum adjustment step permitted by the quality of the received signal determine the actual step of power adjustment. If the value of this parameter is too high, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced, more network interference is caused. If the value of this parameter is too small, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access.
Remarks:
UL RX_LEV Lower Thrsh Value Range: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-107
None 25 The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The signal is not adjusted between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.
Description:
This parameter determines the lower threshold of the uplink signal for power control. If the signal level is below this threshold, calculate an increased value (=
Received
Level). This value, the maximum adjustment range of the level, and the maximum adjustment step permitted by the quality of the received signal determine the actual step of power adjustment (the minimum value of the three values). Remarks: For details, see UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold.
UL Qual.Upper Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 (The smaller quality level indicates the better quality.) Quality level 0 When the power control step is calculated according to the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. Description: This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the stable state quality zone. The upper threshold is larger than or equal to the lower threshold. The power of the MS and the BTS is adjusted according to the quality and the level. For details, refer to the Power Control 2nd Generation Control table. The lower the quality level, the better the quality is. Remarks: If the value of this parameter is too small, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced, more network interference is caused.
UL Qual Lower Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 None 2
3-108
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
When the power control step is calculated according to the signal quality, the quality of the received signal has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter determines the uplink quality lower threshold for the power control.
Remarks:
If the value of this parameter is too high, the quality is poor without power control, thus affecting the conversation quality.
DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 40 The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The signal is not adjusted between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Description: This parameter determines the upper threshold of the downlink signal for power control. If the signal level exceeds this threshold, calculate a decreased value (= Received Level
). This value and the maximum
adjustment step permitted by the quality of the received signal determine the actual step of power adjustment. Remarks: If the value of this parameter is too high, the downlink level becomes high without power control. If the value of this parameter is too small, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) None 30
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-109
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The signal is not adjusted between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Description: This parameter determines the lower threshold of the downlink signal for power control. If the signal level is below this threshold, calculate an increased value (=
Received
Level). This value and the maximum adjustment step permitted by the quality of the received signal determine the actual step of power adjustment. Remarks: For details, see DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold.
DL Qual Upper Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 None 0 When the power control step is calculated according to the signal quality, the quality of the received signal has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter determines the downlink quality upper threshold for the power control. Remarks: None
Description:
DL Qual Lower Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 None 2 When the power control step is calculated according to the signal quality, the quality of the received signal has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter determines the downlink quality lower threshold for the power control. Remarks: If the value of this parameter is too high, the quality is poor without power control, thus affecting the conversation quality.
Description:
3-110
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3.5.2 Advanced Power Control Parameters

Filter length for UL RX_LEV Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 120 None 5 Number of measurement reports in which the average of the uplink signal strength is taken before MS power adjustment None
Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 120 None 5 Number of measurement reports in which the average of the downlink signal strength is taken before BTS power adjustment None
Filter Length for UL Qual.. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 120 None 5 Number of measurement reports in which the average of the uplink signal quality is taken before MS power adjustment None
Filter Length for DL Qual.. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 120 None 5 Number of measurement reports in which the average of the downlink signal quality is taken before BTS power adjustment None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-111
MR Compensation Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes After this function is enabled, put the received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue. Then record the change of transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. After values are added in the measurement report, compensate the received level value in the historical measurement report based on the change of power. Remarks: None
Description:
UL MR Number Predicted Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 03 None 2 In the Huawei 2nd generation power control algorithm, the average filter value in the historical measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is added in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. This parameter determines the number of uplink measurement reports for prediction. Remarks: None
Description:
DL MR. Number Predicted Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 03 None 2 This parameter determines the number of downlink measurement reports for prediction. None
MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 030 dB 4
3-112
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
In the 2nd generation power control algorithm, three quality zones (0, 12, and 3) are defined according to the quality of received signals. A maximum permissible down power adjustment step is set for each quality zone. Description: When you adjust the down power based on the level, note that the maximum permissible down power adjustment step varies according to the quality of received signals. If the value of this parameter is too small, power control cannot be performed rapidly in the algorithm. If the value of this parameter is too high, the validity of power control is reduced. This parameter determines the maximum power adjustment step permitted by power control when the RQ value is 0. Remarks: None
Max Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 030 dB 4 This parameter determines the maximum power adjustment step permitted by the level down power control when the RQ value is quality zone 1 (0 < quality value < 3) during down power adjustment based on the level. None
Description:
Remarks:
Max Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 030 dB 4 This parameter determines the maximum power adjustment step permitted by the level down power control when the RQ value is quality zone 2 (quality value 3) during down power adjustment based on the level. None
Description:
Remarks:
MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 04 dB 4
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-113
This parameter determines the maximum permissible adjustment step during power adjustment based on the quality. None
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 032 dB 16 This parameter determines the maximum permissible adjustment step during up power adjustment based on the level. None
MAX Up Adj.C Value by Qual Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 032 dB 8 This parameter determines the maximum permissible adjustment step during down power adjustment based on the quality of received signals. None
UL Qual Bad Trig Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 Quality level 5 During uplink power control, when the quality of received uplink signals is larger than or equal to this trigger threshold, the actual value of UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold is the one plus the value of UL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff in the data configuration. This parameter further improves the expected level value of uplink power control. Remarks: None
Description:
UL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 dB 0
3-114
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
During uplink power control, when the quality of received uplink signals is larger than or equal to UL Qual Bad TrigThreshold, the actual value of UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold is the one plus the value of UL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff. None
Remarks:
DL Qual Bad TrigThreshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 Quality level 5 During downlink power control, when the quality of received downlink signals is larger than or equal to this trigger threshold, the actual value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold is the one plus the value of DL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff in the data configuration. This parameter further improves the expected level value of downlink power control. None
Description:
Remarks:
DL Qual. Bad Up LEVDiff Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 dB 0 During downlink power control, when the quality of received downlink signals is larger than or equal to DL Qual Bad TrigThreshold, the actual value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold is the one plus the value of DL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff. None
Description:
Remarks:
BTS PC Class Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 116 (030 dB) Class (Each class maps to 2 dB.) 16 This parameter indicates the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. If the value of this parameter is too small, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered. None
Description:
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-115
3.5.3 AMR Power Control

AMR PC Interval Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 115 Measurement report period (480 milliseconds on the TCH; 470 milliseconds on the SDCCH) 3 Minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power control commands If the value of this parameter is too high, the power control interval is too great, and thus the power control may be delayed. If the value of this parameter is too small, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources.
Remarks:
AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 120 None 6 Number of measurement reports in which the average of the uplink signal strength is taken before AMR MS power adjustment None
AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 120 None 6 Number of measurement reports in which the average of the downlink signal strength is taken before BTS power adjustment None
AMR Filter Length for UL Qual Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 120 None 6 Number of measurement reports in which the average of the uplink signal quality is taken before MS power adjustment None
3-116
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
AMR Filter Length for DL Qual Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 120 None 6 Number of measurement reports in which the average of the downlink signal quality is taken before BTS power adjustment None
AMR MR.Compensation Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes/NO None Yes When this parameter is set to Yes, put the received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue. Then record the change of transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. After values are added in the measurement report, compensate the received level value in the historical measurement report based on the change of power. Remarks: None
Description:
AMR UL MR. Number Predicted Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 03 Number of measurement reports 2 In the Huawei 2nd generation power control algorithm, the average filter value in the historical measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is added in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. This parameter determines the number of uplink measurement reports for prediction. Remarks: None
Description:
AMR DL MR.Number Predicted Value Range: Unit: 03 Number of measurement reports
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-117
2 This parameter determines the number of downlink measurement reports for prediction. None
AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 40 The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The signal is not adjusted between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Description: This parameter determines the upper threshold of the uplink signal for power control. If the signal level exceeds this threshold, calculate a level adjustment value (=
Received
Level). This value and the maximum adjustment step permitted by the quality of the received signal determine the actual step of power adjustment. If the value of this parameter is too high, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced, more network interference is caused. If the value of this parameter is too small, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to the uplink optimal received level.
Remarks:
AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 25
3-118
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The signal is not adjusted between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Description: This parameter determines the lower threshold of the uplink signal for power control. If the signal level is below this threshold, calculate a level adjustment value (=
Received
Level). This value, the maximum adjustment range of the level, and the maximum adjustment step permitted by the quality of the received signal determine the actual step of power adjustment (the minimum value of the three values). Remarks: For details, see AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold.
AMR UL Qual. Upper Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 Quality level 0 When the power control step is calculated according to the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. Description: This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the stable state quality zone. The upper threshold is larger than or equal to the lower threshold. The power of the MS and the BTS is adjusted according to the quality and the level. For details, refer to the Power Control 2nd Generation Control table. If the value of this parameter is too small, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced, more network interference is caused. If the value of this parameter is too high, the quality is poor without power control, thus affecting the conversation quality.
Remarks:
AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 Quality level 2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-119
Description:
When the power control step is calculated according to the signal quality, the quality of the received signal has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter determines the uplink quality lower threshold for the AMR power control. If the value of this parameter is too high, the quality is poor without power control, thus affecting the conversation quality. If the value of this parameter is too small, the quality is good without power control, thus reducing the battery life.
Remarks:
AMR DL RE_LEV Upper Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 40 The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The signal is not adjusted between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Description: This parameter determines the upper threshold of the downlink signal for the AMR power control. If the signal level exceeds this threshold, calculate a level adjustment value (= Received Level
). This value and the maximum
adjustment step permitted by the quality of the received signal determine the actual step of power adjustment. Remarks: If the value of this parameter is too high, the downlink level becomes high without power control. If the value of this parameter is too small, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.
AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 30
3-120
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The signal is not adjusted between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Description: This parameter determines the lower threshold of the downlink signal for the AMR power control. If the signal level is below this threshold, calculate a level adjustment value (=
Received Level). This value and the maximum adjustment step permitted by the quality of the received signal determine the actual step of power adjustment. Remarks: For details, see AMR DL RE_LEV Upper Threshold.
AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 Quality level 0 When the power control step is calculated according to the signal quality, the quality of the received signal has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter determines the downlink quality upper threshold for power control. Remarks: None
Description:
AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 Quality level 2 When the power control step is calculated according to the signal quality, the quality of the received signal has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter determines the downlink quality lower threshold for power control. If the value of this parameter is too high, the quality is poor without power control, thus affecting the conversation quality. If the value of this parameter is too small, the quality is good without power control, thus reducing the battery life.
Description:
Remarks:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-121
AMR MAX Down Aaj. Value Qual. Zone 0 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 030 dB 4 In the 2nd generation power control algorithm, three quality zones (0, 12, and 3) are defined according to the quality of received signals. A maximum permissible down power adjustment step is set for each quality zone. Description: When you adjust the down power based on the level, note that the maximum permissible down power adjustment step varies according to the quality of received signals. If the value of this parameter is too small, power control cannot be performed rapidly in the algorithm. If the value of this parameter is too high, the validity of power control is reduced. This parameter determines the maximum power adjustment step permitted by power control when the RQ value is 0. Remarks: None
AMR MAX Down Aaj. Value Qual. Zone 1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 030 dB 4 This parameter determines the maximum power adjustment step permitted by the level down power control when the RQ value is quality zone 1 (0 < quality value < 3) during down power adjustment based on level. None
Description:
Remarks:
AMR MAX Down Aaj. Value Qual. Zone 1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 030 dB 4 This parameter determines the maximum power adjustment step permitted by the level down power control when the RQ value is quality zone 2 (quality value 3) during down power adjustment based on the level. None
Description:
Remarks:
3-122
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
AMR MAX Down Aaj. PC Value by Qual. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 04 dB 4 This parameter determines the maximum permissible adjustment step during power adjustment based on the quality. None
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 032 dB 16 This parameter determines the maximum permissible adjustment step during up power adjustment based on the level. None
AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 032 dB 8 This parameter determines the maximum permissible adjustment step during down power adjustment based on the quality of received signals. None
AMR UL Bad Trig Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 Quality level 5 During uplink power control, when the quality of received uplink signals is larger than or equal to this trigger threshold, the actual value of UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold is the one plus the value of UL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff in the data configuration. This parameter further improves the expected level value of uplink power control. Remarks: None
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-123
AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 dB 0 During uplink power control, when the quality of received uplink signals is larger than or equal to UL Qual Bad TrigThreshold, the actual value of UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold is the one plus the value of UL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff. None
Description:
Remarks:
AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 Quality level 5 During uplink power control, when the quality of received uplink signals is larger than or equal to this trigger threshold, the actual value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold is the one plus the value of DL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff in the data configuration. This parameter further improves the expected level value of downlink power control. Remarks: None
Description:
AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 dB 0 During downlink power control, when the quality of received downlink signals is larger than or equal to DL Qual Bad TrigThreshold, the actual value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold is the one plus the value of DL Qual Bad Up LEVDiff. None
Description:
Remarks:
AMR BTS PC Class Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 116 (030 dB) Class (Each class maps to 2 dB) 16
3-124
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description:
This parameter indicates the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. If the value of this parameter is too small, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered. None
Remarks:
3.6 Channel Parameters

3.6.1 Basic Parameters
Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 Channel 2 This parameter indicates one of the conditions for the dynamic conversion from TCHs to SDCCHs. When the number of idle SDCCHs in a cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, available TCHs in the cell are changed into SDCCHs. By default, this parameter is set to 2. If it is set to a great value, some SDCCHs in the cell may be idle. If it is set to a very small value, the requirement for SDCCHs cannot be met. Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHs to SDCCHs are as follows: Whether the cell allows for the dynamic conversion of SDCCHs; The sum of the number of idle full-rate channels and half the number of idle half-rate channels is greater than four or the number of TRXs in the cell, and an idle full-rate channel is in the cell; The sum of the number of SDCCHs in the cell plus eight is smaller than the maximum number of SDCCHs allowed in the cell. Remarks: None
Description:
Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 80 This parameter indicates the maximum number of SDCCHs that can be configured in a cell. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-125
TCH Minimum Recovery Time (s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 603600 Seconds 60 This parameter indicates the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH. None
Grade Access Allow Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the grading access of subscriber is allowed. Yes: allowed Description: No: prohibited This parameter controls whether the reservation of high priority resource is allowed. When the Grade Access Allow is set to Yes and the License function is allowed, the reservation of high priority resource is allowed. By default, the reservation of high priority resource is prohibited. Remarks: None
Highest Priority Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 114 None 1 This parameter indicates the lowest priority level of the high priority subscribers. When the subscriber priority level is higher than the value of this parameter, the subscriber is a low priority subscriber. If the subscriber priority level is lower than or equal to the value of this parameter, the subscriber is a high priority subscriber. By default, this parameter is set to 1. That is, the subscriber is a high priority subscriber when the subscriber priority level is 0 or 1. If value of this parameter is much great, there may be many high priority subscribers. If the value of this parameter is much small, there may be too few high priority subscribers. Remarks: None
Description:
3-126
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Reserved Channel Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: TCH FULL RATE None TCH FULL RATE This parameter indicates the type of a reserved channel. The reserved channels must be full-rate TCHs (TCHFs). None
Reserved Channel Number Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 06 None 0 This parameter indicates the number of the channels that are reserved for the high priority subscribers. During the channel assignment, the condition of the following inequation must be met: The number of channels occupied by high priority subscribers + the number of idle channels reserved for the high priority subscriber the value of Reserved Channel Number. Description: When the subscriber priority level is lower than the Highest Priority, the system will check whether the condition of the previous inequation is met. If yes, the normal channel assignment for the call proceeds. By default, this parameter is set to 0, which means the reservation of resources is prohibited. If this parameter is set to a great value, that is, too many channels are reserved for the high priority subscribers, the lower priority subscribers may not be able to access the network. If this parameter is set to a small value, insufficient channels may be reserved for the high priority subscribers. Remarks: None
Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-127
This parameter indicates whether the channel rearrangement (two single TCHHs are rearranged as a TCHF) is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the forced handover and delayed call can be avoided but the subscribers who select only TCHFs may fail the calls because the channel rearrangement is prohibited. If this parameter is set to Yes, a call may fail if TCHFs are not selected when the channel rearrangement fails. In ordinary cells, this parameter is suggested to be set to Yes. This ensures the normal timeslot rearrangement. In concentric multi-band cells, set this parameter to No because the forced handover may fail in this situation. By default, this parameter is set to Yes which allows the channel rearrangement. Remarks: None
Description:
3.6.2 Advanced Parameters

HWII Channel Allocation and Radio Channel Control
Idle TCH Threshold N Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 channel 2
3-128
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates one of the conditions for the dynamic adjustment between TCHFs and PDCHs. This parameter is used together with the Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m). If the value of Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) is 0, the BSC cannot apply for any TCH when dynamic PDCHs are used as PDCHs. If the value of Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) is not 0, the Idle TCH Threshold N together with Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) decide the time at which the dynamic adjustment between TCHs and PDCHs begins. A Count is set up in a cell. It ranges from T to T and is initialized as 0. The Count is updated every minute. If the current number of idle TCHs > the value of Idle TCH Threshold N, the value of Count increases by one. If the current number of idle TCHs the value of Idle TCH Threshold N, the value of Count decreases by one. The principle for the dynamic adjustment between the TCHF and PDCH is as follows: When the value of Count > T/2, the dynamic PDCHs can be assigned if the PCU sends a request to the BSC for PDCHs. When the value of Count < T/2, the BSC sends a request to the PCU for dynamic PDCHs and changes the dynamic PDCHs back to TCHs. When there is no available TCH in the cell, the BSC also sends a request to the PCU for dynamic PDCHs. When T/2 < the value of Count < T/2, PDCHs will not be assigned and the dynamic PDCHs will not be changed back to TCHs. Remarks: None
Description:
Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 Minutes 01
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-129
This parameter indicates the period for deciding whether the conversion from a PDCH to a TCH is allowed. This parameter is used together with Idle TCH Threshold N to decide whether the dynamic adjustment between the TCHF and the PDCH is allowed. If the value of Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) is 0, the BSC cannot send a request to the PCU for any TCH when dynamic PDCHs are used as PDCHs. If the value of Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) is not 0, the Idle TCH Threshold N together with Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) decide the time at which the dynamic adjustment between TCHs and PDCHs begins. Description: A Count is set up in every cell. It ranges from T to T and is initialized as 0. The Count is updated every minute. If the current number of idle TCHs > the value of Idle TCH Threshold N, the value of Count increases by one. If the current number of idle TCHs the value of Idle TCH Threshold N, the value of Count decreases by one. The principle for the dynamic adjustment between the TCHF and PDCH is as follows: When the value of Count > T/2, the dynamic PDCHs can be assigned if the PCU sends a request to the BSC for PDCHs. When the value of Count < T/2, the BSC sends a request to the PCU for dynamic PDCHs and changes the dynamic PDCHs to TCHs. When there is no available TCH in the cell, the BSC sends a request to the PCU for dynamic PDCHs. When T/2 < the value of Count < T/2, PDCHs will not be assigned and the dynamic PDCHs will not be changed back to TCHs. Remarks: None
TCH Traffic Busy Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1100 None 50 This parameter indicates the percentage of the occupied TCHs to the total available TCHs. None
Interf.Priority Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
3-130
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates whether the interference priority factor is effective in the channel priority. Description: Yes: effective No: ineffective By default, this parameter is set to Yes. Remarks: None
Active CH Interf Meas Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the interference measurement of the occupied channels is allowed. Description: Yes: allowed No: prohibited By default, this parameter is set to Yes. It is used to choose the subscriber with higher TRX priority. Remarks: None
Allocation TRX Priority Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the TRX priority factor is effective in the channel priority. Description: Yes: effective No: ineffective By default, this parameter is set to Yes so that the channel with higher TRX priority is selected. Remarks: None
History Record Priority Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-131
This parameter indicates whether the factor of the history record priority is effective in the channel priority. Description: Yes: effective No: ineffective By default, this parameter is set to Yes so that the channel with higher history record priority is selected. Remarks: None
Balance Traffic Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the random selection of the channels as the start of the channel traversal is allowed. Yes: selecting the start of the channel traverse randomly Description: No: selecting the next channel of the assigned channel as the start of the channel traverse Generally, this parameter is set to Yes. The random selection of the channel as the start of the channel traversal ensures the balanced channel load. Remarks: None
Interf of UL level Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) Level 10 This parameter indicates the interference threshold of the uplink channel level. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the quality, the lower the signal strength is. The occurrence of the uplink interference can be determinate when: The uplink channel level is higher than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold. The quality grade of the uplink channel is higher or equal to the value of Interf of UL Qual Threshold. An interference indication message will be reported. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists.
Description:
3-132
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Interf of UL Qual Threshold. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 070 Grade 40 This parameter indicates the interference threshold of the uplink channel quality. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the quality, the lower the signal strength is. The occurrence of the uplink interference can be determinate when: The uplink channel level is higher than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold. The quality grade of the uplink channel is higher or equal to the value Interf of UL Qual Threshold. An interference indication message will be reported. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. Remarks: None
Description:
Interf of DL level Threshold. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 (110 dBm to 47 dBm) Level 25 This parameter indicates the interference threshold of the downlink channel level. The occurrence of the downlink interference can be determinate when: The downlink channel level is higher than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level Threshold. Description: The quality grade of the downlink channel is higher or equal to the value Interf of DL Qual Threshold. An interference indication message will be reported. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-133
Interf of DL Qual Threshold. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 070 Grade 40 This parameter indicates the interference threshold of the downlink channel quality. The occurrence of the downlink interference can be determinate when: The downlink channel level is higher than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold. Description: The quality grade of the downlink channel is higher or equal to the value Interf of UL Qual Threshold. An interference indication message will be reported. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. Remarks: None
Filter length for TCH Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 132 None 6 This parameter indicates how many sequential measurement reports are used to determine the level of TCHs. Description: If this parameter is set to a great value, the influence of fluctuation may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a small value, the judgment is imprecise. None
Remarks:
Filter Length for TCH Qual Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 132 None 6 This parameter indicates how many measurement reports are used to determine the quality of TCHs. Description: If this parameter is set to a great value, the influence of fluctuation may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a small value, the judgment is imprecise.
3-134
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Filter Length for SDCCH Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 132 None 2 This parameter indicates how many measurement reports are used to determine the level of SDCCHs. Description: If this parameter is set to a great value, the influence of fluctuation may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a small value, the judgment is imprecise. None
Remarks:
Filter Length for SDCCH Qual Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 132 None 2 This parameter indicates how many measurement reports are used to determine the quality of SDCCHs. Description: If this parameter is set to a great value, the influence of fluctuation may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a small value, the judgment is imprecise. None
Remarks:
Update Period of CH Record(min) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 11440 Minutes 30
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-135
This parameter indicates the duration after which the flow of updating the history channel priority starts. When setting this parameter, adhere to the following principles: 1. Generally, update the history channel priorities in a subtle and frequent manner. For example, update the history channel priority every half an hour or an hour in several concerned busy hours of a day and set Update Freq of CH Record to 2. A too high frequency of updating the history channel priorities is meaningless. A too low frequency of updating the history channel priorities may delay the updating of history channel priorities during the busy hours. 2. In the cells that are affected by fixed interference source or faulty devices, set this parameter to several hours or a day and set Update Freq of CH Record to 4 or 6. After the duration is set by this parameter, the flow of updating the history priority of channels starts. That is, the value of Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of channels to make the priority of the channel higher. The Update Period of CH Record(min) and Update Freq of CH Record work together to prevent the situation that deteriorated channels cannot be assigned for a long time. Remarks: None
Description:
Update Freq of CH Record Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None 2 Lower threshold for updating the history priorities of channels Adhere to the following principles in the configuration of this parameter. 1. Generally, update the history channel priorities in a high frequency and to a small extent. For example, update the history channel priority every half an hour or an hour in several concerned busy hours of a day. A too high frequency of updating the history channel priorities is meaningless. A too low frequency of updating the history channel priorities may delay the updating of history channel priorities during the busy hours. 2. In the cells that are affected by fixed interference source or faulty devices, set this parameter to several hours or a day. The Update Period of CH Record(min) and Update Freq of CH Record work together to prevent the situation that deteriorated channels cannot be assigned for a long time. Remarks: None
Description:
3-136
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the TCH/H prior function is allowed during the channel assignment. Yes: allowed No: prohibited The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required when: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC. The AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes. The percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. For other cases, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required. Remarks: None
Description:
AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 06 None 2 The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required when: Description: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC The AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes The percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. For other cases, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required. Remarks: None
TCH Req Suspend Interval(s) Value Range: Unit: 0255 Seconds
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-137
Default Value:
60 If the dynamic PDCHs configured in the cell are occupied by the PCU, the BSC periodically reclaims dynamic PDCHs from the PCU when the CS services of the cell are overloaded. This parameter indicates that the BSC does not reclaim dynamic PDCHs from the PCU within the period specified by this parameter if the PCU_BSC_TCH_NACK message is received. None
Description:
Remarks:
3.7 Other Property Parameters

3.7.1 Basic Parameters
Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None None In the BTS3002C, if a cell is configured with two TRXs (Site O2 or S2) and this parameter is set to Yes, the diversity of radio connection is supported. If a cell is configured with a TRX (Site O1, S1, or S1/1), the number of configured antennas decides the situation of diversity. If the cell is configured with an antenna (the receipt diversity is not used), and this parameter is set to Yes, the diversity does not exists. If the cell is configured with two antennas (the receipt diversity is used), and this parameter is set to No, the independent diversity exists. Description: In the BTS3002C, the signals transmitted through the primary and secondary antennas are optimized by the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass circuit. The BTS3002C supports the configuration of diversity antennas. That is, the main diversity signals transmitted on a DRU are treated by the LNA circuit and then connected to the diversity port of another DRU through a tributary. Because the main diversity signal is treated by the LNA bypass circuit, the secondary diversity signals need not to be treated by the LNA bypass. After the antenna configuration of a cell is fixed, the IBAM server can configure IBBU properties through the configuration of TRX properties and it can indicate whether the LNA bypass for the secondary diversity signals is permitted through the data written to the logic register. Remarks: None
3-138
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3.7.2 Advanced Parameters

Public Channel Control
Radio Resource Report Period(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Second 10 This parameter indicates the period of sending the RF resource indication message. The TRX reports the interference level for each of the channels that have been idle for the whole measurement period. This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. Refer to GSM protocols 0858 and 0808. If the value of this parameter is too small, the status of the RF resources is reported frequently. Therefore, the burdens on the BSC increase. Remarks: If the value of this parameter is too great, the status of the RF resources is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC cannot process the interference on the BTS in time.
Description:
CCCH Load Indication Period(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 Seconds 15 This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of a load message and the retransmission of the load message. Description: This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a specific CCCH timeslot. Refer to GSM protocol 0858. If the load on a specific CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold, the BTS sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC after every period. The CCCH overload message includes the uplink RACH overload message and the downlink PCH overload message. If the value of this parameter is too small, the signaling traffic on the Abis interface increases and the burdens on the BSC increase. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BSC cannot process the abnormality on the BTS in time.
Remarks:
CCCH Load Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 20100(%) None 80
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-139
This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a specific CCCH timeslot. Refer to GSM protocol 0858. Description: If the load on a specific CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold, the BTS sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC after every period. The period of sending an overload message is the CCCH Load Indication Period. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. This can result in a lower utilization ratio of the system resource and MSs access difficulty. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends the overload message to the BSC only when many MSs access the network and the system resource is insufficient. This can result in system faults.
Remarks:
Overload Indication Period Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 Seconds 15 This parameter indicates the interval between the transmission of an overload message and the retransmission of the overload message from the BTS to the BSC. Description: This parameter controls the frequency of sending the channel overload messages and TRX overload messages. The overload cases include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload and ACCH overload. Refer to GSM protocol 0858. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. This can result in a lower utilization ratio of the system resource and MSs access difficulty. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends the overload message to the BSC only when many MSs access the network and the system resource is insufficient. This can result in system faults.
Remarks:
Average RACH Load TS Number Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 065535 None 5000
3-140
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement. It is used for the measurement of the number of the RACH burst periods during which the received signal level exceeds a given threshold. Refer to GSM protocol 0858. Description: If the threshold is low, the BTS sends the RACH overload message to the BSC. The BSC enables the flow control function in the cell to enhance the minimum received signal level at the MS to decrease the number of RACH accesses. If the threshold is high, the BTS sends the overload message to the BSS only when the system resource is insufficient because many MSs access the network. This can result in system fault. Remarks: None
Abis Flow Control Permitted Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether to allow the flow control on the Abis interface. Description: This flow control function affects the call management. When the system is congested, some service requests are refused or delayed to be served so as to decrease the system load. The flow control on the Abis interface is to decrease the load on the Abis interface of the system. By default, Yes is selected. The flow control on the Abis interface is allowed. Remarks: None
PWRC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether the power control function is allowed. It is one of the Cell Selection parameters in the system information message 3. By default, Yes is selected to inform the MS that the power control function is allowed. Remarks: None
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-141
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 031 Level 5 (900 MHz cells) 0 (1800/1900 MHz cells) This parameter indicates the maximum transmission power level of MSs. It is one of the cell reselection parameters. Description: If the value of this parameter is too great, the allowed transmission power of the MS is great. If the value of this parameter is too small, the allowed transmission power of the MS is small. Refer to GSM protocol 0408. Remarks: None
Support Half Rate Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No This parameter indicates whether the half-rate function is supported. It is one of the cell reselection parameters in the system information message 3. By default, it is set to No. Refer to GSM protocol 0408. Remarks: None
Description:
Other Parameters
Data Service Allowed Value Range: Unit: Default Value: NT14.5K, NT12K, NT6K, T14.4K, T9.6K, T4.8K, T2.4K, T1.2K, T600BITS, T1200/75 (multiple options) None 0001110110
3-142
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates what types of data service are supported. You can set this parameter according to the requirement. 0000000001: support only the NT14.5 kbit/s data service. 0000000010: support only the NT12 kbit/s data service. 0000000100: support only the NT6 kbit/s data service. Description: 0000001000: support only the T14.4 kbit/s data service. 0000010000: support only the T9.6 kbit/s data service. 0000100000: support only the T4.8 kbit/s data service. 0001000000: support only the T2.4 kbit/s data service. 0010000000: support only the T1.2 kbit/s data service. 0100000000: support only the T600BITS data service. 1000000000: support only the T1200/75 data service. Remarks: None
SMCBC DRX Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes To reduce the power consumption, the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is used in the GSM. The MS that supports the DTX has lower power consumption. This prolongs the service time of the MS. Description: A BSC supporting the DRX needs to send the dispatching message to MSs so that the MS can use the DRX. The dispatching period refers to the period of the broadcast messages in a dispatching message. The description and position of the broadcast short message are included in the dispatching message in the sending sequence. Remarks: None
Cell Load0 Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0100 (%) None 20
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-143
There are seven cell load levels numbered 0 to 6 and six cell load thresholds. When the TCH seizure ratio is greater than the value set for the cell load level 0 and smaller than the value set for the cell load level 1, and the difference between the TCH seizure ratio and the cell load level 0 is bigger than the value of Cell Load Change Delay, the cell load is of level 1. If the value set for this parameter is too great, the cell load may still be level 0 when the TCH seizure ratio is very high. If the value set for this parameter is too small, the cell load level may be changed to 1 when the TCH seizure ratio is very low. The cell load threshold, the value of Cell Load Change Delay, and the cell load level are used together to calculate the overall load level of the current cell. Remarks: None
Description:
Cell Load1 Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0100 (%) None 40 There are seven cell load levels numbered 0 to 6 and six cell load thresholds. When the TCH seizure ratio is greater than the value set for the cell load level 1 and smaller than the value set for the cell load level 2, and the difference between the TCH seizure ratio and the cell load level 1 is bigger than the value of Cell Load Change Delay, the cell load is of level 2. Description: If the difference between the value set for this parameter and the value set for the cell load level 1 is big, the cell load level may be still 1 when the TCH seizure ratio is very high. If the difference between the value set for this parameter and the value set for the cell load level 1 is too minor, the cell load level may be changed to 2 when the TCH seizure ratio is very low. The cell load threshold, the value of Cell Load Change Delay, and the cell load level are used together to calculate the overall load level of the current cell. Remarks: None
3-144
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
There are seven cell load levels numbered 0 to 6 and six cell load thresholds. When the TCH seizure ratio is greater than the value set for the cell load level 2 and smaller than the value set for the cell load level 3, and the difference between the TCH seizure ratio and the cell load level 2 is bigger than the value of Cell Load Change Delay, the cell load is of level 3. Description: If the difference between the value set for this parameter and the value set for the cell load level 2 is big, the cell load level may be still 2 when the TCH seizure ratio is very high. If the difference between the value set for this parameter and the value set for the cell load level 2 is too minor, the cell load level may be changed to 3 when the TCH seizure ratio is very low. The cell load threshold, the value of Cell Load Change Delay, and the cell load level are used together to calculate the overall load level of the current cell. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-145
There are seven cell load levels numbered 0 to 6 and six cell load thresholds. When the TCH seizure ratio is greater than the value set for the cell load level 4 and smaller than the value set for the cell load level 5, and the difference between the TCH seizure ratio and the cell load level 4 is bigger than the value of Cell Load Change Delay, the cell load is of level 5. Description: If the difference between the value set for this parameter and the value set for the cell load level 4 is big, the cell load level may be still 4 when the TCH seizure ratio is very high. If the difference between the value set for this parameter and the value set for the cell load level 4 is too minor, the cell load level may be changed to 5 when the TCH seizure ratio is very low. The cell load threshold, the value of Cell Load Change Delay, and the cell load level are used together to calculate the overall load level of the current cell. Remarks: None
Cell Load Change Delay Value Range: Unit: 0100 (%) None
3-146
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
3 There are seven cell load levels numbered 0 to 6 and six cell load thresholds. When the difference between the TCH seizure ratio and the value of a cell load level is bigger than the value of this parameter, the cell load level changes.
Description:
If the value set for this parameter is too great, the change between cell load levels is difficult. If the value set for this parameter is too small, the change between cell load levels may be too frequent. The cell load threshold, the value of Cell Load Change Delay, and the cell load level are used together to calculate the overall load level of the current cell.
Remarks:
None
Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 06 None 5 This parameter indicates the load threshold of a cell that can be a candidate cell. Only the cell whose load is lighter than or equal to this threshold, it can be a candidate cell. This parameter is used to adjust candidate cells. If the value of this parameter is too great, only the cell that has very heavy load can be a candidate cell. Thus, the handover is meaningless. If the value of this parameter is too small, finding a candidate cell is very difficult.
Description:
Remarks:
Interf.Band Threshold.0-5 (dBm) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 115 to +48 dBm 110 (Interf. Band Thresh. 0), 105 (Interf. Band Thresh.1), 98 (Interf. Band Thresh.2), 92 (Interf. Band Thresh.3), 87 (Interf. Band Thresh.4), 85 (Interf. Band Thresh.5).
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-147
This parameter indicates the threshold used for the interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by the serving MSs, calculates, and reports the interference level for each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of the interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels that are the interference band thresholds. The BTS determines which level the interference signals belongs to and reports the interference level to the BSC through the RF resource indication message. The BSC knows the state of channels (busy or idle) through the measurement report and RF resource indication message and determines whether a handover is needed. The measurement result of the interference bands helps to set variable thresholds and analyze the interference. Refer to GSM protocols 0808, 0858, and 1221. Interference band 0 is not measured in the traffic measurement. This parameter ranges from 115 to 85 for BTS2X series, BTS3X series earlier than the version 03.1130, BTS3001 series earlier than the version C07.0301, and BTS3002 series earlier than the version C02.0820. If the value is out of the range, the cell fails to work. This parameter ranges from 115 to 48 for the BTSs but the ones mentioned above.
Description:
Remarks:
Interf Calculation Period (SACCH period(480ms)) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 131 SACCH period (480 ms) 20 This parameter indicates the period over which the average interference level is calculated. Description: The interference levels measured on idle channels are averaged before the transmission of RF resource indication message. The average interference level is used to classify the interference levels on idle channels into five interference bands. Refer to GSM protocols 0808, 0858, and 1221. A too big value of this parameter cannot reflect the change of interference. A too small value of this parameter wastes the resources.
Remarks:
Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) Value Range: Unit: 021 Level (with a step length of 2 dB)
3-148
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value: Description:
5 This parameter indicates the maximum number of levels that the BTS RF power decreases. It controls the reduction in the BTS RF power. A great value of this parameter causes a great reduction in the BTS RF power. A small value of this parameter causes a little reduction in the BTS RF power.
Remarks:
Frame Start Time Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 65535 This parameter indicates the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to keep synchronization between the BTS and MS after the BTS is re-initialized. None
DC Bias Voltage Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0,24 None 0 (with tower-mounted amplifier), 3 (without tower-mounted amplifier) For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference between the RSSI when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed and the RSSI when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed. For the BTS3X, BTS3001C, BTS3002C, and dual-transceiver BTSs, this parameter is not used. Remarks: None
Description:
Power Output Error Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 09 (10 dB to 1 dB) None 2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-149
This parameter indicates one of the triggering conditions for the generation of a BTS alarm. Description: When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated. The Power output error Thrsh and Power output reduction Thrsh indicate the two thresholds of the error. If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller. Remarks: You can configure this parameter for the BTS3X Series Transceiver Station. Practically, this parameter is not used.
Power Output Reduction Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 09 09 (10 dB to 1 dB) 2 This parameter indicates one of the triggering conditions for the generation of a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed value, an error occurs. The Power Output Reduction Threshold and Power Output Error Threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller. Remarks: The configuration of this parameter is optional for the BTS3X Series Transceiver Station.
Description:
VSWR TRX Unadjusted Thrsh Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 012 None 2 This parameter indicates one of the triggering conditions when a BTS alarm is generated. Description: This parameter together with VSWR TRX error Thrsh is used to detect whether the antenna feeder system connecting to the TRX is faulty. If the value of this parameter is smaller, the error is smaller. Remarks: You can configure this parameter for the BTS3X Series Transceiver Station. Practically, this parameter is not used.
VSWR TRX Error Threshold Value Range: Unit: 012 None
3-150
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
2 This parameter indicates one of the triggering conditions when a BTS alarm is generated.
Description:
This parameter together with VSWR TRX unadjusted Thrsh are used to check whether the antenna feeder system connecting to the TRX is faulty. If the value of this parameter is smaller, the error is smaller. You can configure this parameter for the BTS3X Series Transceiver Station. Practically, this parameter is not used.
Remarks:
Frame Offset Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 255, 07 None 0 This parameter indicates the difference between the frame numbers used in different cells of a BTS. The signals transmitted on the FCH and the SCH of neighboring cells are coded in different frames. This facilitates the MS to decode the signals. This also avoids the situation that the measurement reports are missed when the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) cannot be decoded. Thus, this enhances the overall BSC successful handover rate. By default, this parameter is set to 0 that a synchronized handover involving in the cell with a frame offset (not 0) must be changed to an asynchronous handover. If this parameter is set to 255, the frame offset field is not sent. For the BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, BTS3002C, and BTS2X, the OMC needs to set this parameter to 255. For BTS3X, BTS3002C, and dual-transceiver BTSs, the frame offset for the cells can preset according to the value of this parameter.
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-151
At present, six synchronized cells in a BTS are commonly used in the GSM 900/1800 networking. The drive test shows that: When an MS is in the idle state, sometimes the cell cannot reselect the neighboring cell in time because the BSIC of the cell are not decoded. When an MS is having a call, sometimes the signal level of the target cell is high but the BSIC cannot be decoded. This results in a low successful handover rate. The percentage of call drops during handovers accounts for nearly half of the overall call drops. Remarks: When the MS is in the dedicated mode and six synchronized cells are configured in a BTS, the MS can measure the signal level of the neighboring cell and decode the BSIC only during the duration of idle frames. To keep synchronization between cells in a BTS, the FCH of neighboring cells must be decoded and then the messages on the SCH can be decoded. Because the FCH and SCH frame of the other five synchronized cells occur in the same frame duration. The MS can decode only parts of the BSICs for the cells. Thus, the measurement reports of the cells whose BSICs cannot be decoded cannot be reported. The previous situations can be found in the measurement report over the Abis interface by a test MS. It has influence on the system handover determination, that is, the system cannot make the handover determination in time or cannot make the correct handover determination.
Reserved Parameters
Reserved Parameter 110 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 65535 Reserved parameters (numbered 1 to 10) that are used for parameter expansion in later versions None
Cell Soft Parameters

Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 160 Second 15
3-152
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
This parameter indicates the delay time after the cell initialization to detect whether the TRX mutual-aid function is enabled. Description: This parameter is used to delay detecting whether the TRX mutual-aid function is enabled. Because the cell that has just been initialized is not in a stable status, the decision on whether the TRX mutual-aid function is enabled may be incorrect. If the value of this parameter is too small, the decision on whether the TRX mutual-aid function is enabled may be incorrect. Remarks: If the value of this parameter is too great, the TRX mutual-aid function may not be triggered in time when a main BCCH is faulty immediately after the cell is initialized.
Directly Magnifier Site Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None Yes This parameter indicates whether a repeater is present. A repeater is similar to a BTS but has simplified function. Usually, it is placed in the remote area or in the place that has light traffic. It may be configured with only one TRX. This parameter has influence on the handover between repeaters. For repeaters are far from each other, and the handovers between them must be asynchronous. Otherwise, the handover between repeaters fails. None
Description:
Remarks:
Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the T200 timeout is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the T200 timeout is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response) Value Range: 0, 1
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-153
None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized
Description:
If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the error of unsolicited DM response is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the error of unsolicited DM response is measured as a call drop.
Remarks:
None
Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the sequence error is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the sequence error is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure(radio link fail) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the radio link failure is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the radio link failure is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure(HO access fail) Value Range: Unit: 0, 1 None
3-154
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Default Value:
1 0: optimized 1: not optimized
Description:
If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the HO access failure is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the HO access failure is measured as a call drop.
Remarks:
None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure(OM intervention) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the O&M intervention is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the O&M intervention is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure(radio resource not available) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the unavailability of radio resources is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the unavailability of radio resources is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Connection Failure(other) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-155
0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by other reasons of connection failure (besides the previous four connection failures) is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by other reasons of connection failure (besides the previous four connection failures) is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Release Indication Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by either of the following factors is not measured as a call drop: The BTS sends the REL IND message. Description: The call re-establishment expires and the BTS reports a message on the connection failure. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by either of the following factors is measured as a call drop: The BTS sends the REL IND message. The call re-establishment expires and the BTS reports a message on the connection failure. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the Abis territorial link failure is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the Abis territorial link failure is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
3-156
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the equipment failure is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the equipment failure is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the forced handover failure is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the forced handover failure is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the unavailability of measurement reports on the MS for a long time is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the unavailability of measurement reports on the MS for a long time is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-157
Drop Optimize Resource Check Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the resource check is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the resource check is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the expiration of the into-BSC handover is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the expiration of the into-BSC handover is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the expiration of the out-BSC handover is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the expiration of the out-BSC handover is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
3-158
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the expiration of the intra-BSC out-cell handover is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the expiration of the intra-BSC out-cell handover is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0, 1 None 1 0: optimized 1: not optimized Description: If this parameter is set to 0, the call drop caused by the expiration of the intra-cell handover is not measured as a call drop. If this parameter is set to 1, the call drop caused by the expiration of the intra-cell handover is measured as a call drop. Remarks: None
Cell Timers
T3101 (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 50060000 Milliseconds 3000 This parameter indicates the duration of the immediate assignment procedure. Description: The T3101 timer starts when the IMM ASS message is sent and ends when the EST IND message is reported. If the reception of the EST IND message expires, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH. Remarks: None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-159
ImmAss A Interface Creation Timer(ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 100030000 Milliseconds 5000 This timer starts when the CR message is reported and ends when the CC message is received. If the timer expires, the seized SDCCH is released. None
T3103 (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 50060000 Milliseconds 10000 The T3103 timer starts when the intra-BSC handover command is sent and ends when the handover is complete. If the timer expires, the intra-BSC handover fails. None
T7 (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 50060000 Milliseconds 10000 The T7 timer starts when the handover request message is sent and ends when the handover response message is reported. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails. None
T3107 (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 50060000 Milliseconds 10000 The T3107 timer starts when the assignment command is sent and ends when the assignment complete message is sent. If the timer expires, the assignment fails and the seized channels are released.
Description:
3-160
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
T3121 (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 50060000 Milliseconds 10000 The T3121 timer starts when the handover request is sent and ends when the handover complete message is received. If the timer expires, the ClearReq message is sent. None
T8 (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 50060000 Milliseconds 10000 The T8 starts when the handover command is sent and ends when the successful handover message is received. If the timer expires, the out-BSC handover is regarded as unsuccessful. None
T3109 (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 100035000 Milliseconds 27000 The T3109 timer starts when the Channel Release message is sent and ends when the Release Indication message is received. If the timer expires, channels are deactivated. None
T3111 (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 50060000 Milliseconds 1000
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-161
The timer delays the connection release. It delays the deactivation of channels after main signaling links are disconnected. Description: The T311 timer starts when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. It ends when it expires and the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS. None
Remarks:
TREESTABLISH (ms) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 500040000 Milliseconds 15000 Timer for the call reestablish None
LCS Parameters
Input Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: Degree, Multi-Degree None Degrees You can select two types of input for the cell location information: Degree and Multi-Degree. None
Integer of Latitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 090 Degrees 0 Integer of the latitude of a cell Select Degree in the Input Type list
Fraction of Latitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 099999 Degree 0
3-162
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Description: Remark:
Fraction of the latitude of a cell Select Degree in the Input Type list
Integer of Longitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 090 Degrees 0 Integer of the longitude of a cell Select Degree in the Input Type list.
Fraction of Longitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 099999 Degrees 0 Fraction of the longitude of a cell Select Degree in the Input Type list.
Degree of Latitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 090 Degree 0 Degree of a cell Select Multi-Degree in the Input Type.
Minute of Latitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 059 Minutes 0 Minute of the latitude of a cell Select Multi-Degree in the Input Type list.
Integer of second Latitude Value Range: 059
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-163
Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark:
Seconds 0 Integer of the second of the latitude of a cell Select Multi-Degree in the Input Type list.
Fraction of Second Latitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 09 Seconds 0 Fraction of the second of the latitude of a cell Select Multi-Degree in the Input Type list.
Degree of Longitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 090 Degrees 0 Degree of the longitude of a cell Select Multi-Degree in the Input Type list.
Minute of Longitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 059 Minutes 0 Minute of the longitude of a cell Select Multi-Degree in the Input Type list.
Integer of Second Longitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 059 Seconds 0 Integer of the second of the longitude of a cell Select Multi-Degree in the Input Type list.
3-164
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Integer of Second Longitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 09 Seconds 0 Fraction of the second of the longitude of a cell Select Multi-Degree in the Input Type list.
North/South Latitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: North, South None North This parameter indicates whether the cell is in the north latitude or in the south latitude. None
East/West Longitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: East, West None East This parameter indicates whether the cell is in the east longitude or in the west longitude. None
Antenna Azimuth Angle Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 1360 Degrees 360 Azimuth angle of the cell antenna None
Included Angle Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0360 Degrees 360
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
3-165
Description: Remark:
Included angle of a cell None
Antenna Altitude Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remark: 065535 Meters 400 Altitude of the cell antenna None
3-166
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4 TRX Property Parameters
4
About This Chapter
Section 4.1 Frequency Attributes 4.2 RSL Setting
TRX Property Parameters
The following table lists the sections of this chapter. Describes Describes the Frequency Attributes. Describes the channel number setting parameters. Describes the channel property parameters. Describes the device property parameters. Describes the radio link alarm parameters. Describes the reserved parameters.
4.3 Channel Property Parameters 4.4 Device Property Parameters 4.5 Radio Link Alarm Parameters 4.6 Reserved Parameters
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-1
4.1 Frequency Attributes

Cell Name Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: A string of 32 characters None None Name of a cell In a BSC, the cell name must be unique.
Available Frequency 063 (CA) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1124 (900 MHz bands), 512885 (1800 MHz band), 955974 (R-GSM extension band), 0 and 9751023 (E-GSM extension band) None None Number of available frequencies in a specific cell Description: A maximum of 64 frequencies can be configured for a cell. Practically, available frequencies are sequentially configured according to the number of TRXs. The BSC sends the MS the CA table of a cell through the system information. Remarks: If available, frequency 0 is suggested to be configured on the BCCH.
Assigned Frequency 164 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1124 (900 MHz band), 512885 (1800 MHz band), 955974 (R-GSM extended band), 0 and 9751023 (E-GSM extended band) None None Number of frequencies assigned to a TRX Description: When FH is not applied, one frequency is assigned to one TRX. When FH is applied, a maximum of 64 frequencies can be assigned to a TRX, and the assigned frequencies must be available. None
Remarks:
TRX Board Type Value Range: Empty slot, TRX, MFU, DRU, PTRX, ETRX, RTRX, DTRX, RETR, DETR, EETR, PETR, DTRU
4-2
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
None None Type of a TRX board MFU (BTS3001C) DRU (BTS3002C) All types of TRX and ETR (BTS3X series) This parameter applies to only the BTS3X series.
Description:
Remarks:
For dual-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3006C), the corresponding parameter is TRU Frequency Type.
TRU Frequency Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: RGSM(L25), DCS1800, PCS1900, GSM850 None None Frequency type of a TRU in dual-transceiver BTSs This parameter is automatically selected based on the frequencies selected. This parameter applies to only dual-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012, BTS3012AE, and BTS3006C).
Remarks:
4.2 RSL Setting

Flow Control Start Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 30100 (%) None 90 Threshold of enabling flow control Description: When the usage rate of the buffer area for sending signaling messages reaches this threshold, the link is congested. Thus, the signaling messages waiting to be sent are discarded. None
Remarks:
Flow Control End Threshold Value Range: 2090 (%)
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-3
None 60 Threshold of disabling flow control When the usage rate of the buffer area for sending signaling messages is below this threshold, the link is restored. None
TRX Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02047 None None Number of a TRX in a BSC In a BSC, all TRXs are sequentially numbered.
TRX No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 071 None None Number of a TRX in a BTS None
Cell Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02047 None None Number of the cell where the TRX is located In a BSC, all cells are sequentially numbered.
Site Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 02047 None None Number of the site where the TRX is located Sites are sequentially numbered in a BSC.
4-4
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Activity State Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Activated, Not Activated None Activated Whether a TRX is activated Description: A TRX works only when it is active. If a cell is active, all the TRXs under the cell are active. If a cell is inactive, all the TRXs under the cell are inactive. None
Remarks:
Abis Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Auto, Manual None Manual Assignment mode of the Abis interface timeslots assigned for the RSL Usually, the automatic assignment mode is used. Subscribes are also allowed to assign RSL timeslots manually. The manually assigned RSL timeslots cannot be rearranged automatically but can be rearranged manually.
Remarks:
Cabinet No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None None Number of the cabinet where the TRX is located None
SubRack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None None Number of the subrack where the TRX is located None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-5
Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None None Number of the slot in a subrack where the TRX is located None
TEI Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0127 None 0 Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) of the LAPD RSL in a BTS This parameter is used to identify multiplexed LAPD links that occupy the same E1 timeslot. This parameter is set automatically when a TRX is added.
Out-BSC Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None None When BTSs work in forward ring mode, this parameter indicates the number of the subrack where the GEIUB connecting to the RSL link is located. This parameter and Out BSC Slot No. co-determine the location of the GEIUB that connects to the RSL. Remarks: None
Description:
Out-BSC Slot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None None When BTSs work in forward ring mode, this parameter indicates the number of the slot where the GEIUB connecting to the RSL is located. This parameter and Out BSC Subrack No. co-determine the location of the GEIUB that connects to the RSL.
Description:
4-6
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Out-BSC Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 When BTSs work in forward ring mode, this parameter indicates the number of the E1 port (on the GEIUB in the BSC) connecting to the RSL. None
Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0255 None 255 When BTSs work in the forward ring mode, this parameter indicates the port (on a GEIUB in a BSC) timeslot that is occupied by the RSL. The 8 kbit/s E1 sub-timeslots are numbered from 0 to 255. Remarks: For example, the first four 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot are numbered 03. The numberings of the other sub-timeslots are inducted.
RSL In Site Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 When BTSs work in a forward ring mode, this parameter indicates the BTS port number occupied by the LAPD link that is corresponding to a BTS RSL. None
RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 255
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-7
Description:
When BTSs work in the forward ring mode, this parameter indicates the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link that is corresponding to a BTS RSL (on the Abis interface). The 8 kbit/s E1 timeslots are numbered from 0 to 255. For example, the first four 8 kbit/s sub-timeslots of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot are numbered 03. The numberings of the other sub-timeslots are inducted.
Remarks:
RSL Logic No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 20484095 None None Logic number of an LAPD link that corresponds to an RSL In a BSC, all LAPD links are sequentially numbered, and each LAPD link has a unique logic number. None
4.3 Channel Property Parameters

Channel No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 07 None 0 Number of a channel that is sequentially numbered in a TRX When a TRX is configured, it is assigned eight channels ranging from 0 to 7 automatically. None
Channel Type TCH Full Rate, TCH Half Rate (reserved), TCH Half Rate, SDCCH8 Value Range: Main BCCH, Combined BCCH, BCH, BCCH+CBCH, SDCCH+CBCH, PBCCH+PDTCH, PCCCH+PDTCH, PDTCH, Dynamic PDCH None TCH Full Rate Type of a channel that is assigned a timeslot of a TRX
4-8
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
The principles of BCCH configuration are as follows: The BCCHs in a cell must be configured according to the number of channels in a cell and the paging capability in the location area (LA). Timeslot 0 of a TRX is assigned to the primary and combined BCCHs. Timeslot 2, 4, or 6 of a TRX is assigned to the extended BCCHs. If an extended BCCH is configured, the parameters related with the CCCH in the system information must be configured correspondingly. For example, if a BCCH is assigned timeslot 2 of a TRX, two non-combined CCCHs must be configured in the system information. Configure a CBCH for a cell in the radio channel configuration to enable the cell broadcast function for the cell. Pay attention to the following points in the configuration of a CBCH. If an SDCCH/8 is used for a CBCH, you can change a TCH or a SDCCH to SDCCH+CBCH; if an SDCCH/4 is used for a CBCH, select the channel type BCCH+CBCH. Use an SDCCH/8 or SDCCH/4 for a CBCH according to the network planning of the cell. There is no difference in the effect of the cell broadcast service whether a SDCCH/8 or a SDCCH/4 is used for a CBCH. Remarks: Pay attention to the following points if you select TCH HR in the Channel Type field. Because the half-rate networking mode is a special networking mode, its data configuration is different from those in other networking modes. The load on RSLs of every TRX increases. The maximum multiplexing ratio of the LAPD signaling links on the Abis interface is 2:1. An E1 link supports a maximum of 13 TRXs. When LAPD signaling links are not multiplexed, lesser TRXs are supported by an E1 link. The principles of Channel Type configuration are as follows: Configure one SDCCH/8 for one or two TRXs; Configure two SDCCH/8s for three or four TRXs; Configure three SDCCH/8s for five or six TRXs; enable the dynamic SDCCH allocation and ensure that the function works well. Evenly configure the SDCCHs for the TRXs in a cell. For a TRX that is configured with a primary BCCH, configure less than two SDCCHs. For a TRX that is not configured with a primary BCCH, configure no more than two SDCCHs. In 16 kbit/s terrestrial communication mode, configure no more than one SDCCH for a TRX if the MR preprocessing function is not enabled. If the traffic volume is high, you can configure no SDCCH for the TRX with a primary BCCH.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-9
GPRS Channel Priority Type Value Range: Unit: GPRS Channel, EGPRS Normal Channel, EGPRS Priority Channel, EGPRS Special Channel, None-GPRS Channel None When Channel Type is set to non-PDTCH, the default value is None-GPRS Channel. Default Value: When Channel Type is set to PDTCH and the cell does not support EDGE services, the default value is EGPRS Normal Channel. When Channel Type is set to PDTCH and the cell supports EDGE services, the default value is EGPRS Normal Channel. This parameter indicates the EGPRS priority type of a channel. When Channel Type is set to PDTCH, the parameter takes effect. If the parameter is set to GPRS Channel, the MSs that are accessed through EDGE services cannot occupy this channel. Description: If the parameter is set to EGPRS Normal Channel, the MSs that are accessed through both GPRS services and EDGE services can occupy this channel and the priority levels are the same. If the parameter is set to EGPRS Priority Channel, the MSs that are accessed through EDGE services preferentially occupy this channel. If the parameter is set to EGPRS Special Channel, the MSs that are accessed through only the EDGE services can occupy this channel. Remarks: None
HSN Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 063 None None Type of the hopping sequence number (HSN) Description: Value 0 indicates sequential frequency hopping (FH). Value 163 indicates pseudorandom frequency hopping. The HSN of all the channels in a cell must be the same. If the HSN is greater than 63, the MS fails to access the network. Remarks: None
TSC Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 07 None Training sequence code (TSC), the same with the base station color code (BCC) of a cell
4-10
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
The TSC must be the same with the BCC of a cell. Through a specified TSC, an MS or a BTS balances the delay of receiving signals. It cannot balance the delay of co-frequency signals with different TSCs, so that the co-frequency signals with different TSCs cannot be demodulated. The use of the TSC enables the MS or BTS to identify signals that can be received and avoids co-frequency interference in signals. Remarks: When a cell applies the FH, the TSC and BCC of a cell must be the same. Otherwise, the TCHs of the cell cannot be occupied normally.
Description:
TRX Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02047 None None Number of the TRX where channels are located TRXs are sequentially numbered in a BSC.
Cell Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 02047 None None Number of the cell where channels are located Cells are sequentially numbered in a BSC.
Hop Index Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None None Index of the frequency hopping It provides the relation between the channel configuration data and the frequency hopping data. None
MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset) Value Range: Unit: 0255 None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-11
Default Value:
0 Mobile allocation index offset When the frame FH is applied, the channels on a TRX are suggested to be configured with the same MAIO.
Description:
Different TRXs in a cell are suggested to be configured with different MAIOs to ensure that the TRXs (in a synchronous cell) with the same HSN and MA have different MAIOs in the same timeslot. This avoids the co-frequency collision. When the timeslot FH is applied, channels on a TRX can be configured with different MAIOs.
Remarks:
None
Abis Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Auto Allocate, Manual Allocate None Auto Allocate Configuration mode of timeslots for the channels on the Abis interface Description: By default, the Auto Allocate mode is selected and the system automatically assigns the timeslots. The manually assigned timeslot cannot be rearranged during rearrangement of timeslot fragments. In the BTSs cascading mode, if a TRX or a channel in a BTS on the Abis interface is assigned the timeslots manually, timeslots must be assigned manually for the upper-level BTSs of the BTS but not for the lower-level BTSs of the BTS.
Remarks:
Out-BSC Subrack No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the subrack where the TRX is located None
Out-BSC Slot No. Value Range Unit: Default Value: 0255 None 255
4-12
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Number of the slot where the GEIUB connecting to a specific TRX is located None
Out BSC Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None None Number of the E1 port connecting the GEIUB (in the BSC) to the BTS (where the TRX (which a channel belongs to) is located) None
Out -BSC Timeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 Number of the E1 timeslot assigned for a channel None
Up Port No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 When BTSs work in the forward ring mode, this parameter indicates the number of the E1 port occupied by channels on the Abis interface None
Up Timeslot No. Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 0255 None 255 When BTSs work in forward ring mode, this parameter indicates the number of the E1 sub-timeslot occupied by a specific channel on the Abis interface. The 8 kbit/s E1 sub-timeslots are numbered from 0 to 255.
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-13
4.4 Device Property Parameters

Hop Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: None FH, BaseBand FH, RF HOP None None Whether to use frequency hopping (FH) and which FH mode is to be used Description: If None FH is selected, the frequency hopping is not applied in this cell even though the FH data table is configured. Applying FH can obtain average interference and frequency diversity. The BTS2X series base stations support the radio frequency hopping (RF FH). Remarks: All the versions of the BTS3X series base stations support the BaseBand FH and RF FH, including the timeslot FH and frame FH. Dual-transceiver BTSs support both baseband FH and RF hopping, including timeslot-based FH and frame-based FH, but do not support inter-cabinet baseband FH.
Power Level BTS3X series base stations: 010 Value Range: BTS3001C: 0 13 BTS3002C: 010 Dual-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C): 010 Unit: Default Value: None 0
4-14
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
A greater value of this parameter indicates a lower transmission power. Value 0 indicates the highest transmission power. The transmission powers indicated by the ascending power levels are in the descending order. The difference between two neighboring levels is 2 dB. You can increase the value of Power Level to absorb the traffic adequately in a cell. If there is serious cross coverage because antennas are installed in a very high position, you shall consider lowering the heights of antennas and enlarging the tilt angles of antennas. Because decreasing the transmission power of BTSs can result in poor indoor coverage. Ensure that the valid frequencies are in the subset of the CA table. When setting the Power Level for the cells with the same priorities, ensure that Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Powers (EIRPs) of the cells are generally consistent. When setting the Power Level, consider that the power losses of TRXs in a cell differ in different combining manners of TRXs. When FH is not applied, only the first frequency among all the available frequencies of a TRX is useful. Remarks: None
Description:
Power Type Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Macro BTS: 40, 60, BTS3002C: 20, 30, BTS3006C: 40, 20, 63, BTS3012/BTS3012AE: 40,60 W Actual power of a TRX board For the BTS3006C, the default value is 40. Maximum power supported by a TRX Macro BTSs and BTS3002C support different types of power. None
HW_Concentric Attribute Underlay cell Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Overlay cell None None None Whether a concentric cell is configured as an underlay cell or an overlay cell For non-concentric cell, this parameter is configured as None by default.
Description:
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-15
Remarks:
None
TRX Priority Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Level0, Level1, Level2, Level3, Level4, Level5, Level6, Level7 None Level0 TRX priority used in the HW_II channel assignment A smaller value of this parameter indicates a higher priority. A channel with a higher priority is preferred. Description: The TRX Priority is used together with the parameter Allocation TRX Priority Allowed. Only when the parameter Allocation TRX Priority Allowed is se to Yes, channels are assigned according to their priorities. None
Remarks:
Shut Down Enable Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Enable, Disable None Enable Whether the power amplifiers of the TRX are automatically shut down when a BTS is powered off and is supplied by the storage batteries None
TCH Rate Adjust Allow Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Yes, No None No
4-16
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Whether the full-rate TCH is allowed to be converted into the half-rate TCH Yes: The conversion is allowed. No: The conversion is not allowed, and the channels that are converted into half-rate TCHs are changed back forcedly into full-rate TCHs. This parameter also decides whether the TCHs support the dynamic adjustment priority. If yes, the channels that do not support the dynamic adjustment are assigned first. This ensures that the channels supporting the dynamic adjustment are used for channel dynamic adjustment. Therefore, the access requirements of subscribers can be ensured. Remarks: None
Description:
TRX 8PSK Level Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 050 None 0 Attenuation level of an EDGE TRX There are 50 attenuation levels. The difference between two neighboring levels is 0.2 dB. Description: This parameter must be configured because of spectrum requirement. When an EDGE transceiver sends the 8PSK signal, it must adopts the transmission power lower than that for transmitting the GMSK signal. This parameter applies to only EDGE TRXs.
Remarks:
Receive Mode Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Dividing Receiver, Independent Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver None DTRU: Independent Receiver Receive mode of the radio frequency For those TRXs that do not support this function, this parameter is set to 0xFF. Receive Mode and Send Mode must be configured together based on the combination rule matrix. This parameter applies to only the DTRU.
Remarks:
Send Mode Value Range: Wide Band Combining, No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, PBT
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-17
None DTRU: 0 Other boards: 0xFF Sending mode of the radio frequency of the DTRU Receive Mode and Send Mode must be configured together based on the combination rule matrix. This parameter applies to only the DTRU.
4.5 Radio Link Alarm Parameters

Wireless Link Alarm Flag Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: Yes, No None No Whether a BSC sends the parameters of the radio link alarms to the BTS None
Abnormal Release Statistic Base Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 5126 None 100 Base of the sub-channels statistic Suppose that: N: indicates the number of sub-channels that are multiplexed in a timeslot. B: indicates the statistical times that a sub-channel is activated. Description: S: indicates the total times that sub-channels multiplexed in a timeslot are activated. S=BxN During the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormal sub-channel releases is higher than value of Abnormal Warn Threshold, alarms occur. If the percentage of abnormal sub-channel releases is smaller than or equal to the value of Abnormal Warn Threshold, alarms disappear. Remarks: None
4-18
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Abnormal Warn Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 5100 (%) None 100 Threshold of generating alarms on abnormal releases Description: When the percentage of times of abnormal sub-channel release to the total times of successful activation is higher than the threshold of overall times of successful channel activation, abnormal release alarms are generated. None
Remarks:
Abnormal Release Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 080 (%) None 50 Threshold of clearing alarms on abnormal releases Description: When the percentage of abnormal channel releases is not higher than this threshold, a message prompting that abnormal channel releases disappear is reported. None
Remarks:
Statistical Period of No-traffic Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 1255 Minutes 48 Threshold of generating a no-traffic alarm If the duration of continuous (not accumulative) no-traffic reaches this threshold, a no-traffic alarm is generated. None
Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Yes, No None No Whether to report a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless link alarm does not disappear within the recover period of WLA prompting
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-19
Remarks:
None
WLA Prompting Recover Period Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1255 Minutes 12 If a wireless link alarm disappears within the recover period of WLA prompting, a message promoting that the alarm disappears is generated. If the alarm does not disappear within the recover period of WLA prompting, the BTS determines whether to report the critical alarm according to the value of Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit. None
Description:
Remarks:
Begin Time of WLA Detection Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 024 Hours 8 Start time for detecting and reporting wireless link alarms None
End Time of WLA Detection Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 024 Hours 22 Start time for detecting and reporting wireless link alarms The detection and reporting of wireless link alarms begin again as specified by Begin Time of WLA Detection. None
Up Down Balance Basic Difference Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: 0254 Level 8 Basic difference between uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) channel levels
4-20
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
Remarks:
None
Up Down Balance Floating Range Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 10254 Level 30 Allowable floating difference between UL and DL levels Only when the difference between UL and DL levels is within the range specified by Up Down Balance Basic Difference and Up Down Balance Floating Range, the balance is regarded as normal. Description: For example, when Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30, the balance is regarded as abnormal if the uplink level minus the downlink level is greater than 38 or smaller than 22. Other situations are regarded as normal. Remarks: None
Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 20100 (%) None 80 An alarm on abnormal balance between UL and DL is generated if the percentage of MRs reporting abnormal balance reaches or crosses this threshold. None
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)
4-21
4.6 Reserved Parameters

Reserved Parameter110 Value Range: Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks: 065535 None 65535 Reserved parameters (10 parameters) for TRXs They can be used in later versions. None
4-22
Issue 03 (2007-05-09)

Parameter

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Parameter

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

2 BTS Property Parameter............................................................................................................2-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3 Cell Attribute Parameter...........................................................................................................3-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

4 TRX Property Parameters .........................................................................................................4-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1 BSC Property Parameters

BSC Property Parameters

1.1 BSC Global Property Parameters

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 BSC Property Parameters

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1.1 BSC Global Property Parameters

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1 BSC Property Parameters

Support Voice TFO Value Range: Yes, No

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 BSC Property Parameters

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

Unit: Default Value:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1 BSC Property Parameters

Maximum Number of 2 Mbit/s trunk ports Value Range: 065535

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 BSC Property Parameters

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

Unit: Default Value: Description: Remarks:

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1 BSC Property Parameters

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 BSC Property Parameters

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1.1.2 Flow Control Data

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1 BSC Property Parameters

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 BSC Property Parameters

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1 BSC Property Parameters

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 BSC Property Parameters

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1 BSC Property Parameters

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 BSC Property Parameters

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1.1.3 BSC Timer

T1(s) Value Range: Unit: 1300 Seconds

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller Data Configuration Reference

1 BSC Property Parameters

T17(s) Value Range: Unit: Default Value: 1300 Seconds 30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary